2003 Chevrolet Venture Owners
2003 Chevrolet Venture Owners
2003 Chevrolet Venture Owners
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-61
Front
Seats ............................................... 1-3 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Rear
Seats .... .................................... 1-7 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-30 Towing ................................................... 4-32
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-55 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Air Bag Systems ...................................... 1-93 Service ..................................................... 5-3
Restraint
System
Check .......................... 1-103 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Checking Things Under
Keys ........................................................ 2-3 the Hood ............................................. 5-10
Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-9 All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-50
Winaows ................................................. 2-24 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-52
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-27 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-58
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-31 Tires ...................................................... 5-60
Mirrors .................................................... 2-44 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-86
OnStar@ System ...................................... 2-46 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-94
HomeLink@Transmitter ............................. 2-48 Electrical System ...................................... 5-95
StorageAreas ......................................... 2-52 Capacities and Specifications .... 5-1w
Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-62 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 5-104
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
InstrumentPanel Overview .......................... 3-4 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-25 Customer Assistance Information ..................... 7-1
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 3-35 Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2
Message Center ....................................... 3-50 Reporting Safety Defects ........................ 7-8
Driver Information Center (DIG) .................. 3-58 Index ................................................................. 1
Canadian Owners
1-
I
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
GM dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
ii
Safety Warnings and Symbols You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. this book. This safety
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about symbol means “Don’t,’’
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
warning.
...
‘I1
Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices: Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
Notice: These mean there is something that could are shown along with the text describing the operation
damage your vehicle. or information relating to a specific component, control,
A notice will tell you about something that can damage message, gage or indicator.
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. component, gage or indicator reference the following
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the topics:
damage.
Seats and Restraints Systems in Section 1
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in Features and Controls in Section 2
different words. Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use Climate Controls in Section 3
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
p\
LATCH BOTH LAP AND
SHOULDER BELTSTO
PROTECTOCCUPANT
DO NOT TWIST SAFETY
BELT WHENArrAGHlNG
48: @ LIGHTING
MASTER / 8-
- ,
SWITCH
\
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
cc
ACCESS
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
TURN
SIGNALS BAlTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
ENGINE
COOLANT
FAN
p7
CAUSTIC
BAlTERY
MOVE SEAT
FULLY \v/
sz DO NOT INSTALL
A REAR-FACING
LAMPS PC BRAKE (@)
4CID COULD
REARWARD+ CHILD RESTRAINT
CAUSE
SECURE IN THIS SEATING
BURNS
CHILD SEAT POSlTlON
COOLANT OWNER'S
PULL BELT MANUAL
AVO1D
DO NOT INSTALL A
SPARKS OR
FORWARD-FACING
FLAMES COMPLETELY
CHILD RESTRAINT RUNNING ENGINE OIL
rHEN SECURE SERVICE
IN THIS SEATING LAMPS PRESSURE
CHILD SEAT
POSITION
UUUn LUCK n
BATTERY
I UNLOCK
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ...................................................... 1.3 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
Manual Seats ................................................ 1-3 and Small Adults ....................................... 1.52
Six-Way Power Seats ..................................... 1.4 Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................... 1-54
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-4 Safety Belt Extender ..................................... 1.54
Head Restraints ............................................. 1.6 Child Restraints ....................... .............. 1-55
Rear Seats .................................................... 1.7 Older Children .............................................. 1-55
Rear Seat Operation .................................... 1.7 Infants and Young Children ............................ 1-58
Second Row Safety Belt Stowage ..................... 1-7 Child Restraint Systems ................................. 1-61
Flip and Fold Feature ..................................... 1-7 Where to Put the Restraint ............................. 1-65
Split Bench Seats ........................................... 1.8 Top Strap .................................................... 1-66
Bucket Seats ............................................... 1-15 Top Strap Anchor Location ............................. 1-67
Captain Chairs ............................................ -1-22 Lower Anchorages ana Top Tethers for
Stowable Seat .............................................. 1-26 Children (LATCH System) ........................... 1-69
Safety Belts ................................................... 1.30 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................ 1-30 LATCH System ......................................... 1-71
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-34 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-35 Seat Position ............................................ 1-71
Driver Position 1 -36
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat
Position (Third HOWBench seatj .................1-19
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .................. 1-44 Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Right Front Passenger Position ....................... 1.45 Seat Position (Bucket Seat) ........................ 1-77
Center Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) .........1-45 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Center Passenger Position (Bench Seat) ..........1-47 Front Seat Position .................................... 1-79
Rear Seat Passengers .................................. 1-48 Built-in Child Restraint ................................... 1-82
Section I Seats and Restraint Systems
Air Bag Systems ............................................ 1-93 Restraint System Check ................................ 1.103
Where Are the Air Bags? ............................... 1-96 Checking Your Restraint Systems ..................1-103
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-98 Replacing Restraint System Parts After
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ..................... 1-99 a Crash .................................................. 1.1 04
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ..................... 1-99
What Will You See After an Air Bag
inflates? ................................................. 1-100
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ........ 1-102
1-2
Front Seats
Manual Seats
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
Use the lever located on
the front of the seat to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
adiust
-.- the seat forward or is moving. The sudden movement could startle
J -
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
~~ ~ ~
1 -3
Six-Way Power Seats Reclining Seatbacks
I -4
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job becauseit
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would bethere, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is injuries.
moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback Upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and
wear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Head Restraints Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Head restraints are fixed on some models and
adjustable on others. To adjust a head restraint, slide it
up or down.
1-6
Rear Seats Flip and Fold Feature
The rear seats in your vehicle can be folded forward.
Use this feature for exiting and entering third row seats.
Rear Seat Operation 1. If the seats have the adjustable head restraints,
The rear seats in your vehicle have levers and straps push them fully down.
used to adjust, remove and reinstall the seats. By using 2. Fold the seatback flat
the levers and straps, in the correct order, you can on the seat, by either
easily remove the seats from the vehicle. pulling on the nylon
When you put the seats back in the vehicle, be sure to strap on the rear of the
follow the label on the back of the seat for proper seat or lifting up on
location. the lever located on the
front of the seatback.
If the seat adjusts, slide
Second Row Safety Belt Stowage it all the way back.
If your vehicle has a split bench seat in the second row,
use the clip on the safety belt to secure the belt after
it is disconnected from the mini-buckle. When removing
the second row split bench seat, secure the loose 3. Release the rear set of
end of the safety belt in this clip. This will keep the hooks from the floor
safety belt from dangling and possibly striking pins by pulling the
something. nylon strap located at
Do not have the second row outside safety belt stored if the base of the
someone is sitting in the second row outside position. seat; hang on to the
strap as the seat folds
forward.
To return the seat(s) to the normal position, do the Split Bench Seats
following:
If you have the split bench seat (50/50 or 40/60), the
1. Push the seat back and firmly push the rear hooks seatbacks can be folded forward or reclined individually
onto the rear floor pins by pushing down on the and the seats can be removed individually. The
rear of the seat. second row (40/60) sections can also be adjusted
2. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down. forward or rearward individually.
3. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon The second row (40/60) split bench may be equipped
strap on the back of the seat and raise the with a built-in child restraint. See Built-ln Child Restraint
seatback until it locks upright. on page 1-82.
4. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is
locked.
1-8
The other lever is located
Adjusting the Split Bench Seats on the rear of the seat.
(Second Row)
The second row bench seats are adjustable. There are
two adjustment levers on each section of the split
bench seats to adjust the seat forward or rearward.
1-9
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
The seatbacks on each section of the split bench seat Nylon Strap Recliner Lever
can be either folded forward or reclined. The following
explains how to use the nylon strap or recliner lever To fold the seatback forward, pull the nylon strap
to fold or recline the seatbacks. located on the rear of the seat or lift up on the recliner
lever located on the front of the seatback. The
seatback will lock into place.
To raise a seatback, pull the nylon strap or lift the
recliner lever while raising the seatback until it locks
upright. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is
locked into place.
To recline the seatback, pull the nylon strap or lift the
recliner lever. Press back on the seatback until you
reach the desired position then let go of the strap
or lever.
1-10
To return the seatback to an upright position, pull on the 4. If the seat is in the second row, lift one sf the
nylon strap or lift the recliner lever without putting any adjustment levers and slide the seat fully rearward.
pressure on the seatback. Push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked into place.
1-11
Replacing the Split Bench Seats
1
6. To unlatch the front latches, squeeze the angled
bar toward the straight crossbar. A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
7. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly forward, move around in a collision or sudden stop.
then toward the rear of the vehicle and then People in the vehicle could be injured.Be sure
pulling it out. to lock the seat into place properlywhen
installing it.
Repeat these steps for the other section of the split
bench seat.
1-12
The seat must be placed in the proper location for the
legs to attach correctly.
Make sure the seat is in the full rear position before
beginning this procedure.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
1-13
2. Make sure the bench
seat is angled so that
the front hooks
clear the floor pins.
1-14
5. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down. Bucket Seats
6. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon
strap on the back of the seat and raise the If your vehicle has the bucket seats, the seatbacks can
seatback until it locks upright. be folded down or reclined. The seats can also be
adjusted forward or rearward and removed.
7. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is
locked. One of the bucket seats may be equipped with a built-in
child restraint. See Built-ln Child Restraint on page 1-82.
8. If you have the 40/60 seat, attach the mini-buckle
so that the safety belt is ready for use when a
passenger uses the seat.
The buckle reattaches by pushing the latch into the
buckle until the red center pops out again.
Repeat these steps for the other section of the split
bench seat.
1-15
Adjusting the Bucket Seats The other lever is
located on the rear of the
There are two adjustment levers on each seat to adjust bucket seat.
the seat forward or rearward.
1-16
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
~
1-17
To raise a seatback, pull the nylon strap or lift the Removing the Bucket Seats
recliner lever while raising the seatback until it locks
upright. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is Make sure the seatback is in the upright position. The
locked into place. head restraints should be fully down.
To recline the seatback, pull the nylon strap or lift the 1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon
recliner lever. Press back on the seatback until you strap on the back of the seat to fold the seatback
reach the desired position then let go of the strap forward.
or lever. 2. Slide the seat all the way back by lifting either one
To return the seatback to an upright position, pull on the of the adjuster levers and sliding the seat fully
nylon strap or lift the recliner lever without putting any rearward.
pressure on the seatback. Push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked into place.
1-19
R e p k i n g the Bucket Seats
I
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
If the seatback isn’t locked,it could move protection needed in a crash.The person
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always After installing the seat, always check to be
press rearward on the seatback to be sureit is sure that the safety beltsare properly routed
locked. and attached, and are not twisted.
I
Don’t put the seats in so they face rearward because
they won’t latch that way. If you want more storage room
behind the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward.
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can The bucket seats have seat position labels, located on
the back of the seat, showing where the seat must
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
go. Follow that diagram. The seat must be placed in the
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure proper location for the legs to attach correctly.
to lock theseat into place properly when
installing it.
1-20
Make sure the seats are in the full rear position before
beginning this procedure.
1. With the seat folded, squeeze the angled bar
toward the straight crossbar while placing the
front hooks of the bucket seat onto the front two
floor pins.
2. Make sure the bucket
seat is angled so that
the front hooks
clear the floor pins.
4. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins
by pushing down the rear of the seat.
5. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.
3. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear 6. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon
legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins. strap on the back of the seat and raise the
If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check seatback urliii ii imks upriyiii.
that the seat is in the full rear position. 7. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it
is locked in place.
1-21
Captain Chairs Fl-’dir- l r Reclining ?“e Se-’backs
If your vehicle has the captain’s chairs, the seatbacks -II II
can be folded forward or reclined and the seats can
be removed.
Adjusting the Captain’s Chairs If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
(Second Row) cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
The second row captain’s chairs can be adjusted press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
forward or rearward. locked.
There are two adjustment levers on each seat. One is
located below the center, in front of the seat. The
other is located across the rear of the seat.
Lift up either lever to slide the seat forward or rearward.
Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to make
sure it is locked into place.
1-22
Removing the Captain’s Chairs
CAUTION:
2. The seat can then be lifted off the front floor pins
and removed from the vehicle.
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
1-24
Make sure the seatbacks are in the upright position, the
seat belts are on the correct side of the chairs and
the second row captain’s chairs are in the full rear
position before beginning this procedure.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
1-25
Stowable Seat
Your vehicle may have a stowable seat. The stowable
/ \ seat is a full bench seat and comes with the
convenience center. See Convenience Center on
page 2-59 for more information. The stowable seat can
be removed and replaced, or with the seatback
folded, it can lie flush with the convenience center.
2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the rear If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
latches onto the rear set of floor pins. forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is properly
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
attached.
locked.
1-26
To fold down the seatback, Removing the Stowable Seat
pull up on the lever located
on the back of the seat 1. Remove the convenience center, if it is in the
and push the seatback vehicle. See Convenience Center on page 2-59
down until it is locked into for more information.
place. 2. Make sure all items are off of the stowable seat.
3. If the seatback is down, put the seatback in
its upright position before removing the seat.
See “Folding the Seatback” previously.
1-28
The seat must be placed in the proper location for the
legs to attach correctly.
Make sure the seat is in its upright position before
beginning this procedure.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
1. Place the front hooks of the seat onto the front
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
floor pins in the third row. To do this, the seat
protection needed in a crash. The person will need to be angled so the front hooks clear the
wearing the belt could be seriously injured. floor pins.
After installing the seat, always check to be
If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear
sure that the safety belts are properly routed legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.
and attached, and are not twisted.
2. Firmly push the rear hooks into the rear floor pins
by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
10 not put the stowable seat in so it faces rearward 3. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it is
because it will not latch that way. The stowable seat has locked down.
to go in before the convenience center. See
Convenience Center on page 2-59 for more information. 4. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it
is locked into place.
The stowable seat has seat position labels, located
on the back of the seat, showing where the seat must
go. Follow the floor pin diagram. Use the front floor
pins of the floor cups and the rear floor cups in the
third row.
1-29
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo
belts properly. It tells you some things you should not area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a
do with safety belts. collision, people riding in theseareas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.Do not
allow people t o ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t seat and using a safety belt properly.
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1-30
Your vehicle has a light Why Safety Belts Work
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
Safety Belt Reminder it goes.
Light on page 3-40.
1-31
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
1-34
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an Be aware that there are special things to know about
accident - even one that isn’t your fault - you and safety belts and children. And there are different
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 7-55
control, such as bad drivers. or Infants and Young Children on page 1-58. Follow
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of those rules for everyone’s protection.
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
and deaths occurat speeds of less than 40 mph vehicle has.
(65 km/h).
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-35
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-36
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt isn't long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 1-54.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be lesslikely
to siiae unaer h e iap beit. ii you siiu UII&I- ii, ti-lt: k . l t
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
5. To m i k e the lap part tight, pull down e!-! the buck!e The safety be!t !O&S if there's a sudden stop or crash,
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-37
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster To move it down, push down on the button and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder
adjuster to the height that is right for you. belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pushing the button
down to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
1-38
Q: What's wrong with this?
h
I)r*
Thn
I , , " .- --- InncP
ehnlllrlar
",,"UlUVl
halt ic tnn
Y " . ..----. It \A/nn't 2ive nearly
as much protection this way.
1-39
Q: What's wrong with this?
1-40
Q: What's wrong with this?
1-41
Q: What’s wrong with this?
1-42
Q: What's wrong with this?
I I 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I
1-43
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
1-44
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the Center Passenger Position
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For (Bucket Seat)
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-45
Lap Belt 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If
the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, let it go
If your vehicle has bucket seats, someone can sit in the back all the way and start again. Pull up on the
center position bucket seat. latch plate to make sure it is secure.
3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it.
1-46
Make sure the release button on the buckle is Lap Belt
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to. If your vehicle has a third row rear bench seat, someone
can sit in the center position.
1-47
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-48
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
m m e=-
Lap-Shoulder Belt 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
1,- I I
Lelts;. nele 3
9 - I
I IUVV
L- __.__..
tu v w a l
--- ,,,,,,I.,
PIu p c ~~ y .
UI IC
across you very quickiy. i i this nappens, iei ine beii
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
In the third row, if the belt stops before it reaches
the buck!e, ?i!tt h e !atch plate and keep pulling
until you can buckle it.
1-49
Third Row Outside Passenger Position
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-54.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-50
,--. /--\
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash, To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
I-51
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. This feature will provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have outgrown booster
seats and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder
belt, the comfort guide better positions the belt away
from the neck and head.
If your vehicle has bucket seats in the second row,
there is one guide for each outside passenger position.
If your vehicle has a bench seat in the second row,
there is one guide for the driver’s side outside passenger
position. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and booster
seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may
be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install
a comfort guide and use the safety belt: 1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
1-52
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. You’ll find
them on the buckle end of the safety belts for the driver
and right front passenger. They help the safety belts
reduce a person’s forward movement in a moderate to
severe crash in which the front of the vehicle hits
something.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts Aftera Crash on page 1- 104.
1-54
Child Restraints Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
Older Children lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-55
0:What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the samebelt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured.A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-56
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, i n a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
--ri. -.-??- .
~ -- - - ..-
~ ,
1-57
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle's
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-58
For example, in a crash at only25 mph Children who are up against, or --ry ,.Jse to,
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
become a 240-lb. (1 10 kg) force on a person’s injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
arms. A baby should be secured in an belts offer outstanding protection for adults
appropriate restraint. and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
1-59
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Newborn infants need complete support,
Selection of a particular restraint should take including support for the head and neck. This
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
and age but also whether or not the restraint will is weak and its head weighs so much
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
be used. an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
For most basic types of child restraints, there are restraint, so the crash forces canbe
many different models available. When purchasing a distributed across the strongest part of an
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a always should be secured in appropriate infant
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle restraints.
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-60
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed.A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain lowon the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a bodyarea that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be securedin
appropriate child restraints.
1-61
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
seating surface against the back of the infant. The the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-62
Q: How d o child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
L
1-63
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child Q: When securing an aftermarket child seat in a
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it bucket seat, I am unable to get the seat
will have a label saying that it meets federal fastened in snugly enough. What should I do?
motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You
A: With some child seats, it may be difficult to tighten
the vehicle belts so that there is less side-to-side or
may find these instructions on the restraint itself or
front-to-back movement of the child seat. A
in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the
replacement buckle, which makes it easier to
belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to
secure your child seat, is available from your dealer
be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
at no charge to you.
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come
with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself
or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The
child restraint instructions are important, so if they
are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
1-64
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics showthat children are safer if they
I
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore,recommends that child You may secure a forward-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant restraint in the right front seat, but before you
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a do, always move the front passenger seat as
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the
booster seat. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint child restraint in a rear seat.
in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION: (Continued)
I
1-65
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether”. It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-66
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child Top Strap Anchor Location
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Don’t use a child restraint that requires a top strap in
the right front passenger’sposition because there’s
no place to anchor the top strap.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the top
strap under it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Second Row
1-67
Third Row Third Row (Stowable Seat)
An anchor bar for a top strap is located at the rear of The anchor bar for the stowable bench seat is located
the seat cushion for each second and third row outboard on the passenger’s side of the crossbar. Use the center
seating position, and for the center position of the seating position to use the anchor bar properly. If the
second row. convenience center is in the vehicle, you must lift
the tray sill to use the anchor.
1-68
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
for Children (LATCH System) points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You'll find as shown here.
anchors (A) in the second row outboard bucket seats,
the 40 side of the 60/40 split bench seat and both
second row captain's chairs.
1-69
If a LA._ _ - -~ r e c....d restraint ---)’tattached to
its anchorage points, the restraintwon’t be
able to protect a child sittingthere. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System” or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat
Position” in the Index for information on how
to secure a child restraint in your vehicle.
1-70
Securing a Child Restraint Designed Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
for the LATCH System Outside Seat Position
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want
i
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 3
1-71
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-66 if the child restraint has a top strap or top
tether. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint, Secure the child in the child
restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In the third row, tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt
if needed.
1-72
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safetv belt auicklv if vou ever had to.
1-73
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-74
Securing a Child Restraint
in a Center Seat Position
(Third Row Bench Seat)
1-75
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
1-76
Securing a Child Restraint in 1. Put the restraint on the seat.
\/-.*'It L- .--:--ly + L m I n n hrrlt Cnn T n n Ctrgn nn ngna 7-65 2. Pull the lap belt all the way out without stopping.
1 UU I I U G UJll L I IG lup UUII. vuu I vy - & I uy Y , y W y -
I
if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the 3. While holding it out, run the belt through or around
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child restraint. The child restraint instructions
the child in the child restraint when and as the will show you how.
instructions say.
1-77
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 5. To tighten the belt, feed it back into the retractor
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the while you push down on the child restraint. If
safety belt quickly if you ever had to. you're using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-78
Securing a Child Restraint in the Your vehicle has a front passenger air bag. Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
Right Front Seat Position
. .
1-79
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-66 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 1-3 or Six-Way
Power Seats on page 1-4.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-80
18- C
Built-In Child Restraint
60/40Bench Seat
Bucket Seat
1-82
If your vehicle has this option in a bucket seat, each Q: What if the top of my child’s shoulders is above
bucket seat that has the built-in child restraint fits in only the shoulder belt slots for the five-point child
one location in your vehicle. To find out where a restraint harness system?
bucket seat that has a built-in child restraint must be
located in your vehicle see Rear Seat Operation A: A child whose shoulders are above the shoulder belt
on page 1-7. If your vehicle has this option in a slots for the five point child restraint harness system
60/40 bench seat, this bench seat will only fit in the shouldn’t use this child restraint. Instead, the child
second row of your vehicle. In both types of seats, the should sit on the vehicle’s regular seat cushion and
built-in child restraint works the same way. use the vehicle’s adult safety belts.
This child restraint system conforms to all applicable I
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Each child restraint is designed for use only by children
who weigh between 22 and 40 pounds (10 and 18 kg)
and whose height is between 33.5 and 40 inches BE. -IREYOU USE THIS C -D RESTRAINT,
(850 and 1 016 mm) and who are capable of sitting BE SURE THE TOP OF THE CHILD’S
upright alone. SHOULDERS IS BELOW THE SLOTS THAT
The child should also be at least one year old. It is THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH. A CHILD
important to use a rear-facing infant restraint until the WHOSE SHOULDERS ARE ABOVE THOSE
child is about a year old. A rear-facing restraint gives the SLOTS COULD BE INJURED DURING A
infant’s head, neck and body the support they would SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. IF THE TOP OF
---^I
I
.-, - v - - h vuu
:c C n n AlrJor P h i l r l r n n An nano 1-55
IGGU II I U U I U J I I . uluv, V I.*IU.
-8 (I - 8 r-3-
8
TI
I
IF -I
nL LvrlILU
111 m 7 e
3 31
munI 11
n u
IUULYLI
n e m a ? IC A nfi\/r
IU nuu w L.
TUC
I I I-
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-58. SLOTS, DON’T USE THIS CHILD RESTRAINT
WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION.
1-83
Securing a Child in the Built-In Child
Restraint
1-84
3. Lower the child restraint cushion. You’ll be using the child restraint’s harness (A)
to secure your child. Don’t use the vehicle’s
safety belts.
1-85
Using the vehicle’s regular safety belts on a
child seated on the child restraint cushion can
cause serious injury to the child in a sudden
stop or crash. If a child isthe proper size for
the built-in child restraint, secure the child
using the child restraint’s harness. But
children who are too largefor the built-in child
restraint should sit on the vehicle’s regular
seat and use the vehicle’s adult safety belts.
1
Warning: Failure to follow the manufacturer’s
instructions on the use of this child restraint system can
result in your child striking the vehicle’s interior during
a sudden stop or crash. Snugly adjust the belts provided 4. Before placing the child in the child restraint, add
with this child restraint around your child. slack to the shoulder harness. Pull the black
shoulder harness release strap firmly. At the same
time pull both shoulder harness straps through
the slots in the seatback as shown.
5. Place the child on the child restraint cushion.
1-86
8. Place the other side of the harness over the child’s
shoulder.
9. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-87
An unfastened shoulder harness clip won’t
help keep the harness in place on the child’s
shoulders. If the harness isn’t on the child’s
shoulders, it won’t be able to restrain the
child’s upper body in a sudden stop orcrash.
The child could be seriously injured. Make
sure the harness clipis properly fastened.
11. Now fasten the left and right halves of the shoulder
harness clip together. The purpose of this clip is to
help keep the harness positioned on the child’s
shoulders.
I -aa
12. Pull the shoulder harness adjustment strap (C) 13. Adjust the position of the harness on the child’s
firmly until the harness is snugly adjusted around shoulder by moving the clip along the harness
the child. You should not be able to put more than until it is level with the child’s armpits. On each side
two fingers between the harness and the child’s of the harness, the shoulder part should be
chest. Make sure the harness and buckle strap are centered on the child’s shoulder. The harness
not twisted. should be away from the child’s face and neck, but
not falling from the child’s shoulders.
If you expect that the child will sleep while riding,
you can recline the seatback. See Spiit Bench
Seats on page 1-8, Bucket Seats on page 1-15.
1-89
8
E
Q
2
3
5
CD 0
cn I
8
o_
3
-.
P 5
8
m
C
I.
0 lu
Storing the Built-In Child Restraint
Always properly store the built-in child restraint before
using the vehicle's lap-shoulder belt.
1-91
4. Then press the leg rest firmly into the seatback, 5. Rotate the head restraint forward and push it all the
and secure it by pressing the upper corners way down.
against the fastener strips on the seatback. Just like the other restraint systems in your vehicle, your
built-in child restraint needs to be periodically checked
and may need to have parts replaced after a crash. See
Checking Your Restraint Systems on page1- 103 and
Replacing Restraint SystemPa& After a Crash on
page 1- 104.
1-92
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the right
Air Bag Systems front passenger, the words AIR BAG will appear on the
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag air bag covering on the side of the right front
systems. passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
Your vehicle has air bags - a frontal air bag for the
driver and anotherfrontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impact
air bag. Side impact air bags are available for the driver
and right front passenger.
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the
driver, the words AIR BAG will appear on the air bag
covering on the side of the driver’s seatback closest to
the door.
1-93
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
1-94
L. ~ryoungctlrenandinfants.Neitherthe
Botl- .rental and sid mpact air bags inflate
~
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, The system checks the air bag electrical system for
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-40
belts offer the best protection for adults, but for more information.
I CAUTION: (Continued)
I
1-95
Where Are the Air Bags?
1-96
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or evendeath. The path of an
inflating air bag must be keptclear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on ornear any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact airbag.
1-97
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact air
bag. See Air Bag Systems on page 1-93. Side impact air
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal. side crashes. A side impact air bag will inflate if
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate the crash severity is above the system’s designed
only if the impact speed is above the system’s “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with
designed “threshold level.” specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level for to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph (19 to For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
29 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment is of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so air bags, inflation is determined by the location
that it can be somewhat above or below this range. and severity of the impact.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
1-98
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules. provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
Frontal air bag modules are located inside the steering the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with side body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in the frontal air bags would not help you in many types
seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
passenger’s door. side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags. and onlv in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicle’s with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag.
1-99
What Will You See After an Air Bag
InfIates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly s , tht., is dust ... the
Whe.. A n air bag i ....__
that some people may not even realize the air bag
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the for people with a historyof asthma or other
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bag and the breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal the vehicle should get out as soonas it is safe
air bag. For vehicles with side impact air bags, the side to do so. If you have breathing problems but
of the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
front passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
that come into contact with you may be warm, but window or a door. If you experience breathing
not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust problems following an air bag deployment, you
coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air should seek medical attention.
bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
1-1 00
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, 0 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the between a moderate frontal impact and a more
right front passenger air bag. severe frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equipped
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an with a crash sensing and diagnostic module,
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for which records information about the frontal air bag
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air system. The module records information about
bag system won’t be there to help protect you the readiness of the system, when the system
in another crash. A new system will include air bag commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
modules and possibly other parts. The service usage at deployment. The module also records
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace speed, engine RPM, brake and throttle data.
other parts. Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
1-101
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front Vehicle
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
module and the instrument panel for the right front around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service
passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and seatback for the driver’s and right front and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,
passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or see Service Publications Ordering Information on
break the air bag coverings. page 7-9.
1-102
Restraint System Check Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Checking Your Restraint Systems If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn or
frayed harness straps can rip apart under impact forces
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
just like torn or frayed safety belts can. They may not
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
protect a child in a crash. If a harness strap is torn
and anchorages are working properly. If your vehicle
or frayed, get a new harness right away.
has a built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure
the harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, child Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
head restraint and anchorages are working properly. have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system does not need regular maintenance.)
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
1-103
Replacing Restraint System Parts If you’ve had a crash, do you need new safety belts or
built-in child restraint parts or LATCH system parts?
After a Crash After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness
straps were stretched, as they would be if worn during a
more severe crash, then you need new parts. If the
LATCH system was being used during a more severe
A crash can damage the restraint systems in crash, then you may need new LATCH system parts.
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may If the frontal air bags inflate, you’ll also need to replace
not properly protect the person using it, the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt
resulting in serious injury or even death in a buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle
crash. To help make sure your restraint assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
systems are working properly after a crash, If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps
have them inspected and any necessary are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage
replacements made as soon as possible. also may mean you will need to have safety belt, built-in
child restraint, LATCH system or seat parts repaired
or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary
even if the safety belt, built-in child restraint or
LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of the
collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
1-104
Section 2 Features and Controls
2- 1
Section 2 Features and Controls
2-2
Keys
2-3
This key can be usedfor Any new PASS-Key@I l l key must be programmed
the ignition as well as all before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key 111 on
door locks, the liftgate lock page 2-29 for more information on programming
and the storage your new key.
compartments.
Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features
that can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your keys inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-5.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer, who can If your vehicle is equipped with the Onstar@system with
obtain the correct key code. an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
Your vehicle has the PASS-Key@Ill vehicle theft the vehicle, Onstar@may be able to send a command to
system. The key has a transponder in the key head that unlock your vehicle. See Onstat@System on page 2-46
matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column. for more information.
If a replacement key or any additional key is needed,
you must purchase this key from your dealer. The
key will have PK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag
that came with the original keys. Give this tag to your
dealer if you need a new key made.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. e Check the distance. You may be too far from your
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: rainy or snowy weather.
1. This device may not cause interference, and e Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
2. This device must accept any interference received, be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
including interference that may cause undesired left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
operation of the device. try again.
e Check to determine if battery replacement is
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: necessary. See "Battery Replacement" under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
1. This device may not cause interference, and page 2-6.
2. This device must accept any interference received, e If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
including interference that may cause undesired
qualified technician for service.
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
~ r~~thnrizer?
! service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System With the content theft-deterrent system, the UNLOCK
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will
Operation disarm the system. See Content Theft-Deterrent OP
page 2-27 for more details.
You can lock and unlock
When you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to
your doors and the liftgate
unlock your vehicle or to operate the power sliding
from about 3 feet (1 m)
door(s), the parking lamps will flash to let you know the
up to 30 feet (9 m)
command was received.
away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter If you would like to change the way the parking lamps
supplied with your vehicle. operate with remote unlock confirmation, see Vehicle
Personalization on page 2-62.
LOCK: To lock all doors, press LOCK on the remote
keyless entry transmitter. See Power Door Locks
on page 2-1 1 for more details on the power door lock
features. With the content theft-deterrent system,
the LOCK button may arm the system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-27 for more details.
UNLOCK: When you press UNLOCK on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, only the driver’s door will When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
unlock. If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds, lock your vehicle, the parking lamps will flash to let you
all the doors and the liftgate will unlock. If you would know the command has been received. If you press
like all the doors to unlock the first time you press the LOCK button again, within five seconds, the horn will
UNLOCK, see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-62. sound and the parking lamps will flash to let you
know the vehicle is already locked.
If you would like to change the way the parking lamps
and horn operate with remote lock confirmation,
see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-62.
2-6
Remote Alarm You can operate the power sliding door(s) with the
remote keyless entry transmitter only when the power
When you press the button with the horn symbol on the sliding door override switch(es) on the overhead console
remote keyless entry transmitter, the parking lamps is turned off. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on
will flash and the horn will sound. This will allow you to page 2- 17.
attract attention, if needed.
Press the panic button again to stop the alarm from If your vehicle's fuel filler door is opened, the driver's
sounding. side power sliding door will not open completely. Do not
try to force the door. Once the fuel filler door is
Remote Power Sliding Door Operation closed, the driver's side sliding door can be opened
normally.
If your vehicle has the power sliding door, your
remote keyless entry transmitter will have a button that Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
has a van symbol on it. Press it to open or close the
sliding door. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on Vehicle
page 2-17.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
If your vehicle has the dual power sliding doors, your prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
remote keyless entry transmitter will have two buttons If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
that have a van symbol on them. The van symbol on the be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
left is for the driver's side sliding door and the van any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
symbol on the right is for the passenger's side sliding your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
d ~ r See. P n w r .Clidin_n Door (PSD) on page 2-17. +v----i++nr , lrahipln anw mmaining trsnsmitters
+ny v u lr
L I U I 1 3 1 I I I L L U l L" ""I ""'Y, U..
If the power sliding door(s) is locked, first unlock must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
all doors, then press the van symbol to open the power new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
sliding door(s). The parking lamps will flash when your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum
the right button with the van symbol is pressed and they of four transmitters matched to it.
will not flash when the left button with the van symbol
is pressed. Press the van symboi again to ciose
the sliding door(s). See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on
page 2- I7 for more information.
2-7
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notices When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
I
1. Insert a flat object like a coin into the slot on the
side of the transmitter and twist it to separate the
2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not
halves. use the metal flanges to pop out the battery.
3. Replace the battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves
are snapped together tightly so water will not get in.
5. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for
seven seconds to synchronize the transmitter.
6. Check the transmitter operation.
2-8
Doors and Locks
Door Locks Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
Un.,;ked doors can t, dangerous. whenever you leave it.
Passengers - especially children- can Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
easily open the doors andfall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
handle won’t open it. You increase the help prevent this from happening.
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren’t locked.So, There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive. From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-9
To unlock either front door from the outside with the
key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of
the vehicle. If your vehicle has power door locks, you
can unlock all of the doors and the liftgate by inserting
the key, turning it toward the front of the vehicle
and holding it there for one second. To lock either front
door from the outside with your key insert the key
and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle. If your vehicle
has power door locks, all of the doors will unlock
when you insert the key and turn it toward the rear of
the vehicle.
2-10
Power Door Locks You can lock all doors and the liftgate from the inside
by pressing the rear of the power lock switch on
either front door. With the content theft-deterrent system,
the power door lock switch may cause the system to
arm. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-27 for more
details.
Also, when the doors are locked with the power door
locks, the inside as well as the outside door handle
cannot open the doors. This safety feature prevents a
door from being accidentally opened from the inside
by moving the handle.
To override this safety feature, unlock the door you
want to open.
When the liftgate has been unlocked with the power
door locks, you won’t need the key to open it. Simply
squeeze the handle located above the license plate.
This is also true if you use the remote keyless
From the inside, press the front of the power door lock
entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System
switch (on either front door) to unlock all doors and
on page 2-5.
the liftgate. With the content theft-deterrent system, the
power door lock switch will not unlock the doors until
the system is disarmed. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-27 for more details.
2-11
Last Door Closed Locking Programmable Automatic
The last door closed locking feature will delay the power Door Locks
locking of the doors and liftgate for up to five seconds
after exiting the vehicle, when the power door lock All of the doors will lock automatically when you move
switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry your shift lever out of PARK (P). All doors will unlock
transmitter is used to lock your vehicle. automatically when the ignition is turned off while
the shift lever is in PARK (P).
To cancel this delay, press the power door lock switch
or the lock button on the remote keyless entry If someone needs to get out while you are not in
transmitter a second time immediately. PARK (P), have that person use the manual lever or the
power door lock switch. When the door is closed
If any door or the liftgate is open when locking the again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual
vehicle, three chimes will be heard signaling that last lever or the power door lock switch to lock the door.
door closed locking is being used. Five seconds after the
last door is closed, all of the doors will lock. To change the way automatic door locks operate, see
Vehicle Personalization on page 2-62.
If the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY, this feature
will not lock the doors. With the automatic door locks feature, you can lock or
unlock the doors at any time, either manually or
To turn the last door closed locking feature off or on, using the power door lock switches.
see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-62,
2-12
Sliding Door Delayed Locking Leaving Your Vehicle
If either sliding door is open when you use the power If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door locks to lock the vehicle, the sliding door that door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out
is open will not lock. Normally the last door closed and close the door.
locking feature will be used to lock the sliding door after
it has been closed. Dual Sliding Doors
When the ignition is on or if the last door closed locking
To open either sliding door from outside the vehicle, pull
feature has been overridden or programmed to be the handle out and then pull the door toward the rear.
off, the sliding door delayed locking feature will lock your If you slide the door all the way back, the door will rest in
sliding door for you. Three seconds after a sliding a detent position.
door is closed, all the doors will lock.
To move the door forward, you must first pull the door
past the open detent position.
The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open only a
The lockout protection feature makes it difficult for you little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens,
to lock your keys in your vehicle. If the driver’s door don’t try to force the sliding door. Just close the driver’s
side sliding door. Then when the fuel filler door is
is open while the keys are in the ignition, a chime will
closed, the driver’s side sliding door can be opened
sound and you will not be able to use your power
normally.
door lock switch to lock the vehicle.
If you don’t leave the keys in the ignition or if you use
the manual door lock, you could still lock your keys
in your vehicle. Always remember to take your keys
with you.
T- .c_ +hi,- am
$fin+, riff nr nn \/ahjp/a
I u
+a
LUII I LI 1 1 3 lcalulc UII VI VI I, eulr Y UIJSVSV
2-13
Sliding Door Lock
If yourvehicle is facingdlardonasteep
grade (15 percent or more), the door may not
stay open and could slam shut,
possiblyinjuring someone. To make sure the
door does not slam shut be sure to hold it
open until everyone is clear of the door, and
only then allowit to slowly close.
2-14
Sliding Door Security Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with a sliding door security
lock that helps prevent young children or other
passengers from opening the sliding door(s) using the
inside door handle. To use one of these locks, do
the following:
1. Open the sliding door.
2. On the inside of the
sliding door(s), on the
'8. I
front edge of the
door will be a lock.
t
Push the lever
up to engage the lock.
v e / / / c / er G I D U I / a / / L a t wI / V I I puyb L WL.
2-15
If your vehicle has the power sliding door(s), you can Canceling the Sliding Door
override the security lock by pressing either power door
lock switch when the power sliding door override Security Lock
switch(es) is turned off. When the power sliding door 1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door from the
override switch(es) is turned on, the power sliding outside.
door(s) cannot be opened from the inside when the
sliding door security lock is in use. 2. Push the security lock lever all the way down.
If you want to open the sliding door when the security 3. Close the door.
lock is on, unlock and open the door from the outside. 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.
You should let adults and older children know how The sliding door lock will now work normally.
the security lock works, and how to cancel the lock. If
you don’t, adults or older children who ride in the
rear won’t be able to open the sliding door from the
inside when the security lock feature is in use.
2-16
Power Sliding Door (PSD) To open or close the sliding door(s), press and release
one of the following power door switches.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can open and close
the sliding door(s) using the switches inside of your
vehicle. You can also operate the power sliding door(s) U
with your remote keyless entry transmitter. See cr
zzI3
Remote Keyless Entry System on page 2-5.
To help avoid accidental operation of the sliding door(s), If you have the one power sliding door, these switches
press the part of the power sliding door override are located in the overhead console switchbank.
switch(es) with the don’t symbol.
2-17
If you have the dual sliding Notice: When your vehicle goes through an
doors, your vehicle has automatic car wash, be sure the power sliding door
these switches. The is turned off. If it isn’t, the power sliding door
left switch is for the driver’s may open accidentally.
side power sliding door
and the right switch is for This switch is in front
the passenger’s side of the driver’s or the
sliding door. The power passenger’s side
sliding door and the power sliding door.
sliding door override is
one switch.
2-18
If the power sliding door(s) is open or in the process of
closing when you shift out of PARK (P), a buzzer
will sound. This is a warning that the sliding door(s) is
not completely closed.
If the power to the sliding door(s) is turned off, the
buzzer will not sound indicating the door(s) is not
completely closed.
2-19
The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open only a
little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens,
don’t try to force the sliding door. When the fuel filler
door is closed, the driver’s side sliding door can
be nnnr\ed normally.
2-20
Resetting the Power Sliding Door
The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or not at
all because of the following conditions:
.f your cle ._.,cingC,.vnwalon
VI asteep 0 A low voltage or dead battery,
grade (15 percent or more), the door may not
disconnecting the battery, or
stay open and could slam shut, possibly
injuring someone. To make sure the door does if the instrument panel PWR/HEATED SEAT PSD
not slam shut, turn on the power sliding door fuse or the underhood fuse 8, 27 or 29 are
feature. Then if the door closes, it will close removed or blown.
under the control of the power door system. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95 for more
information about your fuse panel.
If you want to close the power sliding door(s) when the If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding door
override switch(es) is turned off, pull the inside or will need to be reset. If your vehicle has the dual
outside handle or the edge of the door. Move the door power sliding doors, both doors will have to be reset.
about 4 inches (10 cm) toward the closed position To do this:
and release it. The door will close completely and latch 1. Check to be sure the power sliding door is unlocked
for you. and securely closed.
To close the power sliding door(s) when the override 2. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
switch(es! is turned on, pull the inside or outside handle
and slide the door all the way forward to the latched
position.
2-21
3. If on, turn the power sliding door override switch off. Liftgate
4. Remove fuse 29 from the underhood fuse block.
Leave it out for 30 seconds. To unlock the liftgate from the outside, turn the key in
the cylinder clockwise or use the remote keyless
5. Reinstall the fuse and wait 10 seconds. entry transmitter. To lock the liftgate using the key, turn
6. Turn the power sliding door override switch on. the key counterclockwise.
7. Press either of the power door lock switches to open Open the liftgate using the handle located above the
the power sliding door. license plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise
by itself. Lamps in the rear of the vehicle will come
8. Open the door all of the way.
on, illuminating the rear cargo area. See lnferiorLamps
9. Wait five seconds and close the door by pressing on page 3- 17.
either power door lock switch.
Notice: Be sure there are no overhead
10. Wait five seconds and repeat Steps 7 through 9. obstructions, such as a garage door, before you
If the door does not rest in the fully open position after open the liftgate. You could slam the liftgate
repeating Step 7, repeat Steps 7 through 9 again. If into something and break the glass.
the door still does not operate correctly, see your dealer
for service.
2-22
It can -2 dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’tsee or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
I death. If you must drive with the liftgate open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
i
connections must pass through the seal
I between the body and the liftgate:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
@ Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle, then
control setting that will force outside air
I firmly shut the liftgate. Don’t drive with the liftgate open,
into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls”
even slightly. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-42.
I
in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the A message in your instrument panel cluster will warn
instrument panel, open them all theway. you if the liftgate is not completely closed. See
See ”Engine Exnausi“ in ihe index. REJ Mfch Ajar Waminyn Message on paae - 3-56.
2-23
Windows
Manual Windows
Use the manual cranks to open and close the front
windows.
2-24
Power Windows Express-Down Window
To activate the express-down feature, push the AUTO
switch all the way down to the second position, then
release it. The window will lower completely. To stop the
window from lowering all the way, pull up on the front
of the switch.
2-25
Power Rear Quarter Windows Press the part of the switch with the symbol to close
both windows. The windows can be closed fully or
Your vehicle may have power rear quarter windows. partway depending on how long the switch is pressed.
The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY or
+ This switch, located in the
p i )
4
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active, to
overhead console
use the power rear quarter windows. See “Retained
switchbank, is used for
Accessory Power (RAP)’’ under Ignition Positions
opening and closing
on page 2-3 I .
the power rear quarter
windows.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull down the sun visor. You will see the vanity mirror.
Press the textured part of the switch to open the Lighted Vanity Mirror
windows; both windows will open. The windows will
continue to open as long as the switch is pressed until Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the
they are fully opened. vanity mirror. The lamps will come on when you open
the cover.
2-26
Theft-Deterrent Systems While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power
door lock switch.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to
Although your vehicle has anumber of theft-deterrent
enter the vehicle (without using the remote keyless entry
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
transmitter or a key) or turns the ignition to ON. The
impossible to steal.
horn will sound and the parking lamps will flash for up to
two minutes.
Content Theft-Deterrent
When the alarm is armed, the liftgate may be opened
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent alarm system. with the remote keyless entry transmitter or with a key.
2-27
Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry Arming Confirmation
Transmitter If remote unlock confirmation is on, your parking lamps
Your alarm system will arm when you use your remote will flash briefly to let you know when your alarm
keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors, if the key system has disarmed. If you would not like the parking
is not in the ignition. The security light will turn on to let lamps to flash, see Vehicle Personalization on
you know the system is arming. After all doors and page 2-62.
the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will Disarming with the Remote Keyless
begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know
the system is armed. Entry Transmitter
Arming with Your Key Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors.
Your alarm system will arm when you use your key to The security light will stop flashing to let you know the
lock the doors. The security light will turn on to let system is no longer armed.
you know the system is arming. After all doors and the
liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will Disarming with Your Key
begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key
system is armed. If you would like your key not to
to unlock the doors. The security light will stop
arm the system, see Vehicle Personalization on
flashing to let you know the system is no longer armed.
page 2-62.
If you would like your key not to disarm the alarm
system, see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-62.
2-28
PASS-Key@111 PASS-Key@111 Operation
Your PASS-Key@ Ill system operates on a radio Your vehicle is equipped
frequency subject to Federal Communications with the PASS-Key@Ill
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. (Personalized Automotive
This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Security System)
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: theft-deterrent system.
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, PASS-Key@I l l is a passive
and (2) this device must accept any interference theft deterrent system.
received, including interference that may cause This means you don’t have
undesired operation. to do anything different
to arm or disarm the
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
system. It works when you
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
insert or remove the key
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
from the ignition.
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than When the PASS-Key@I l l system senses that someone
an authorized service facility could void authorization to is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s
use this equipment. starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and
fnn! \.vi!! s@ hein2 delivered to the engine. Anvone
PASS-Key@ Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle. using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security message
c ~ r n e sonj the key may have a damaged transponder
Turn the ignition off and try again.
2-29
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to To program the new key:
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, 1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
you may also want to check the instrument panel PASS
KEY fuse. If the engine still does not start with the 2. Insert the ignition key in the ignition and start the
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle engine. If the engine will not start see your dealer
does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer or for service.
a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key@111 to 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF
have a new key made. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers and remove the key.
on page 5-95.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to RUN
It is possible for the PASS-Key@Ill decoder to learn the within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 additional keys may be programmed for the 5. The security message will turn off once the key has
vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional keys been programmed. It may not be apparent that the
only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do security message went on due to how quickly
not operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith the key is programmed.
who can service PASS-Key@Ill to have keys made and 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
programmed to the system. be programmed.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service If you are ever driving and the security message comes
PASS-Key@Ill to get a new key blank that is cut exactly on and stays on, you will be able to restart your
as the ignition key that operates the system. engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key@Ill system,
however, is not working properly and must be serviced
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys, by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key@I l l to PASS-Key@Ill system at this time.
have new keys made. To program additional keys you
will need two current driver’s keys (black in color). If you lose or damage a PASS-Key@Ill key, see your
You must add a step to the following procedure. After dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key@Ill to
Step 3 repeat Steps 1 through 3 with the second current have a new key made.
driver’s key. Then continue with Step 4.
2-30
Starting and Operating Your Ignition Positions
Vehicle With the key in the ignition, you can turn it to five
different positions.
2-31
B (LOCK): This is the only position from which you can If the engine is not running, ACCESSORY and RUN are
remove the key. This position locks your ignition, positions that allow you to operate your electrical
steering wheel and transaxle. accessories, such as the radio.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
can’t turn it, be sure you areusing the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in?If it is, then turn the steering With RAP, the power windows, power rear quarter
wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. windows, audio system and the automatic level control
Turn thekey only with your hand. Using tool a will continue to work up to 10 minutes after the
to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. ignition key is turned to OFF and none of the doors are
If none of these works, then your vehicle needs opened.
service.
C (OFF): This position unlocks the ignition, steering Starting Your Engine
wheel and transaxle but, does not send power to Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
any accessories. Use this position if your vehicle must Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a
be pushed or towed, but never try to push-start your safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
vehicle.
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
D (RUN): This is the position to which the switch Notice: Don’t try to shift toPARK (P) if your
returns after you start your engine and release the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage the
ignition key. This is the position for driving. Even when transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
the engine is not running, you can use RUN to vehicle is stopped.
operate your electrical accessories and to display some
instrument panel warning lights. 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
E (START): This position starts the engine. When the go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
engine starts, release the ignition key. The switch your engine warms up.
will return to RUN for normal driving.
2-32
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than Engine Coolant Heater
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If the engine doesn't start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way
down while you turn the key to START. Do this until
the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of
the key.
3. If your engine still won't start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your acceleratorpedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still won't start or starts briefly but then stops again, Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. In
repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on the temperature. very cold weather, 0°F (-18°C) or colder, the engine
When the engine starts, release the key and coolant heater can help. You'll get easier starting
the accelerator pedal. and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
usuaiiy, ine c-uuiat~t1lt;'att;'I S I I U U I U L
I- I--..I-J .-l*,m-mA .
uz pluyyGu :E 2
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
At temperatures above 32°F (OOC), use of the coolant
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
heater is not required.
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with yourdealer. If you don't, your engine
might not perform properly.
2-33
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
1. Turn off the engine. kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
electrical cord is located on the driver’s side of the your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
engine compartment. vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1IO-volt AC outlet.
I
I
won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
I
Maximum engine speed is limited when you’re in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and There are several different positions for your shift lever.
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
2-34
PARK (P): This gear position locks your front wheels.
It’s the best position to use when you start your
engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle It is dangerous t o get out of your vehicle if the
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
when the ignition key is in RUN. As you step on the Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you may hear a running unless you haveto. If you have left the
click from the solenoid of the system. This ensures that
engine running, the vehicle can move
the system is operating properly.
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on be sure your vehicle won’tmove, even when
the shift lever - push the shift lever all the way into you’re on fairly level ground, always set your
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move
parking brake and move the shift lever to
the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out
of Park (P) on page 2-4 1. PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in the
Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towinga
Trailer” in the Index.
2-35
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. Notice: Damage to your transaxle caused by
shifting into a drive gear with the engine racingisn’t
Notice; Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle covered by your warranty.
is moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
is stopped. normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow.
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on accelerator pedal about halfway down.
page 4-30. Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go
faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive veryfar that way, your
vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens,
have your vehicle serviced rightaway. Until then,
you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving
Shifting l l l r ~a drive gear while your elldine is less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC
“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds.
Unless your footis firmly on the brake pedal,
your vehicle could move very rapidly. You
could lose control and hit people or objects.
Don’t shift into a drive gear while your engine
is racing.
2-36
Warm-up Shift Use THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as
much as possible. Don’t shift into SECOND (2)
Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle unless you are going slower than65 mph (105 km/h)
designed to warm up the engine faster when the outside or you can damage your engine.
temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder. You may notice
that the transaxle will shift at a higher vehicle speed until Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
the engine is warmed up. This is a normal condition slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go
designed to provide heat to the passenger compartment faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
and defrost the windows more quickly. See Climate system sensor. If you drive very far thatway, your
Control System onpage 3-25 for more information. vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens,
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, have your vehicle serviced rightaway. Until then,
but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). than 35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher
speeds.
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
When driving on hilly, winding roads. (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
When towing a trailer (so there is less shifting
If the shift lever is put in FIRST (I), the transaxle
between gears).
won’t downshift into first gear until the vehicle is going
When going down a steep hill. slow enough.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but Notice: If your front wheels won’t turn, don’t try to
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on drive. This might happen if you were stuckin
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down very deep sand or mud or wereup against a solid
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to object. You could damage your transaxle. Also,
use your brakes off and on.
if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your
Notice: Don’t drive in SECOND (2j for more than VelllLlt: L I I C l t *
*--L:..l-+t-.--- l l l y the acce!eratcr peds!. This
uk
~I l+-nl\l
V V*l C
25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your
(90 k d h ) , or you can damage your transaxle. brakes to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
2-37
Parking Brake If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-4 1.
The parking brake is
located on the driver’s side To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
under the instrument pedal down with your right foot while you push down on
panel. the parking brake pedal with your left foot. (To release
the tension on the parking brake cable, you will need to
apply about the same amount of pressure to the
parking brake pedal as you did when you set the parking
brake.) When you remove your foot from the parking
brake pedal, it will pop up to the released position.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
down with your right foot and push down on the parking see Towing a Trailer on page 4-36. That section shows
brake pedal with your left foot. what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-38
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
Shifting Into Park (P)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and Pull the lever toward you.
set the parking brake with your left foot.
2-39
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Runnin-
2-40
Torque Lock Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of control system. You have to fully apply your regular
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl brakes before you can shift from PARK (P), when
in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the the ignition is in RUN.
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the may hear a click from the solenoid of the system.
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) This ensures that the system is operating properly.
on page 2-39. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-34.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. the shift lever by pushing the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another try to move the shift lever into the gear you want. If you
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you out of PARK (P), try this:
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
A
v.
P L - ALL- ,
you want.
, , : , --A
e + L n m -h;$+tr\
3 L a I L LI IC GI IYII IC UI tu LI IGI I J I 1 1 1 1 LW
+hn Ar;,,,-,
CI IU UI a v - ,-,bQr
3V-t
2-4 1
Parking Over Things That Burn
2-42
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to kn-.. It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK(P) with
the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you haveto. If you’ve left the
Idling the engine with the climate control engine running, the vehicle can move
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into suddenly. You or others could be injured.
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under To be sure your vehicle won’tmove, even
“Engine Exhaust.’’ when you’re on fairly level ground, always
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly set your parking brake and move theshift
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even lever to PARK (P).
if the fan is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust - with Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
CO - can come in easily. NEVER park in a move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-39.
garage with the enginerunninq. .y.Gu’i-e Fu;;;i-,y a ~ e T6VVLY
e L?. Ti?L?.jLi-
uii
2-43
Mirrors Turn the control counterclockwise to select the driver’s
side rearview mirror, or clockwise to select the
passenger’s side rearview mirror.
Manual Rearview Mirror Then use the control to adjust each mirror so that yocr
can see a little of the side of your vehicle and the
To reduce glare from lights behind you, pull the lever
area beside and behind your vehicle when you are
toward you (to the night position). To return the mirror to
sitting in a comfortable driving position.
the day position, push the lever away from you.
If you are not adjusting either mirror, leave the control in
the center off position. This prevents moving the
Outside Power Mirrors mirrors accidentally once you have them adjusted.
The control located on the Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or rearward.
driver’s door operates both In the rearward position, they will fold almost flush
outside rearview mirrors. with the vehicle. This feature is particularly useful in
automatic car washes.
2-44
Outside Convex Mirror Outside Heated Mirrors
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex If your vehicle has the outside rearview mirrors, they are
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the heated when you activate the rear window defogger.
driver’s seat. See “Rear Window Defogger” in C/imate Control System
on page 3-25.
2-45
Onstar@System Onstar@Services
Onstar@ provides a number of service plans. Some of
the services currently provided by Onstar@are:
Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock
2-46
Onstar@’Personal Calling Onstar@’Virtual Advisor
With Onstar@Personal Calling, you have a safer way to With Onstar@Virtual Advisor you can listen to the news,
stay connected while driving. It’s ahands-free wireless entertainment and informative topics, such as traffic
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place and weather reports. You are able to listen and reply to
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no your e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers.
contracts, no roaming charges and no access fees. To
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
find out more about OnStarm Personal Calling, refer
prior to delivery of Onstar@services and prepaid
to the Onstar@user’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box,
calling minutes are also required for Onstar@Personal
or call OnStar@ at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
Calling and Onstar@Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
2-47
HomeLink@ Transmitter If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink@
transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
HomeLink, a combined universal transmitter and to use this equipment.
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink information can be found on the internet
at www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
2-48
Programming the HomeLink buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
Transmitter transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink@buttons.
Do not use the HomeLink@Transmitter with any garage 2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
door opener that does nothave the “stop and reverse” 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink@
feature. This includes any garage door openermodel buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
manufactured before April 1, 1982. 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as button on HomeLink@and the hand-held transmitter
well as for future HomeLink@ programming. It is also button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
recommended that uponthe sale of the vehicle, has been completed.
the programmed HomeLink@buttons should be erased Some entry gates and garage door openers may
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink@ require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink@on the noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling Programming” later in this section.
1-800-355-351 5. 4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage rapidly after HomeLink@successfully receives the
door or gate operator you are programming. When frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside Release both buttons.
of the garage.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink@button
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in and observe the indicator liqht.
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more If the indicator light stays on constantly,
accurate transmission of the radio frequency. programming is complete and your device
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while should activate when the HomeLink@button is
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to pressed and released.
program up to three channels: To program the remaining two HomeLink@buttons,
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons, begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLinP.’7
releasing only when the indicator light begins to Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the programmed channels.
2-49
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds Gate Operator and Canadian
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
Programming
programming of a rolling-code equipped device Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
(most commonly, a garage door opener). signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head
HomeLink@to pick up the signal during programming.
unit) in the garage, locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
button. This can usually be found where the hanging “time out” in the same manner.
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” programming a gate operator by using the
button. The name and color of the button may “Programming HomeLink@” procedures (regardlessof
vary by manufacturer. where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8. HomeLink@”with the following:
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the Continue to press and hold the HomeLink@ button while
programmed HomeLink@button for two seconds, you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
been successfully accepted by HomeLink@. The
sequence a second time, and depending on the
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink@”
code device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete.
to complete the programming.
HomeLink@should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink@buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink@.”Do not
repeat Step 1.
2-50
Using HomeLink@ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink@
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLinkO button for at Button
least half of a second. The indicator light will come To program a device to HomeLink@using a HomeLink@
on while the signal is being transmitted. button previously trained, follow these steps:
Erasing HomeLink@Buttons 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkO button.
Do not release the button.
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following: 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink@
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. HomeLink@.”
2. Release both buttons. Bo not hold for longer than
30 seconds. Resetting Defaults
HomeLink@is now in the train (learning) mode and can To reset HomeLink@to default settings do the following:
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
under ”Programming HomeLink@.” 20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be 2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink@
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single indicator light turns off.
HomeLink@Button” next.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink@at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-51
Storage Areas Compact Overhead Console
Your vehicle’s large carrying capacity can store many
items. If you have the extended wheelbase version, you
can carry things as large as a 4’ x 8’ piece of plywood.
You can also use the floor pins that are used to
attach the seats, to secure larger loads.
Glove Box
Your vehicle has a glove box below the instrument
panel. To open the glove box, lift the latch release.
The glove box door has a detent to prevent the door
from lowering too far. Open the glove box until the door
is partway open, then pull the door down if you need
it fully open. To close the glove box, the door must
be pushed up past the detent.
2-53
Garage Door Opener Compartment
You can store your garage door opener in the rear
compartment of your overhead console, and operate it
from this position. To install your garage door opener,
follow these instructions:
1. Open the compartment by pressing the latch
forward.
2. Peel the protective backing from the hook and loop
fastener and press it firmly to the back of your
garage door opener.
2-54
Front Seat Storage Net
2-55
Luggage Carrier
2-56
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage
carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than Turn the release knob counterclockwise to unlock the
150 Ibs. (68 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage crossrails. Slide the crossrails forward or back, as
your vehicle. needed, to accommodate loads of various sizes.
When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a After repositioning the crossrails, be sure to tighten the
proper size and
-.
weight,put it on the slats, as far forward release knobs by turning them clockwise. This will
as you can. I nen siide the crossraii up ayairlsi ii~e lock the crossrails in place.
rear of the load, to help keep it from moving. You can
then tie it down.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-34.
2-57
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The
convenience net is designed to help keep small loads,
like grocery bags, from falling over. Install the
convenience net at the rear of your vehicle, inside the
liftgate.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
2-58
.
Convenience Center
2-60
The tray sill can be folded down onto the stowable seat
to close the space between the two whenthe stowable
seat is folded down. To do this, flip the sill plate up
and over toward the stowable seat.
The cover of the convenience center can be left in its
upright position while the vehicle is moving.
The convenience center has six hooks on the inside
I\ cover for hanging items on. The prop rods can hold up
to 49 Ibs. (21.8 kg) on the cover of the convenience
center while in its upright position.
The convenience center and the stowable seat both
have a maximum weight capacity of 400 Ibs. (181.6 kg).
\
Notice: Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
4. Put the tray sill, located on the back of the
convenience center, in the upright position.
5. Slide the convenience center in and align it so that
the forks, located on the bottom rear of the
convenience center, slide into the seat anchors.
6. Press down on the front of the convenience center
so the center locates on the sill mounting bracket.
7. Turn the hand knob clockwise until it is tight.
8. Pull up on the convenience center to make sure it
is locked into place.
Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle’s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features. The features you can
program depend on the options that came with your vehicle. The following chart shows the features that can be
programmed. To determine which features your vehicle is equipped with, follow the steps listed for entering the
programming mode.
Feature
Number of Delayed Automatic Door
Last Remote Remote Content Content
chimes Illumination/
Door Locks Closed Driver’s Lock/Unlock Theft Theft
Locking/
sounded Exit Confirmation Arming/
Lighting Lockout Unlock Disarming
L
Deterrent
Control
X X X -
X X X X
I 4 X X I X X X X
2-62
Entering Programming Mode Delayed Illumination and Exit
To program features, your vehicle must be in the Lighting
programming mode. Follow these steps:
This feature allows you to customize the interior lamps
1. The content theft-deterrent system must be when entering and exiting the vehicle.
disarmed. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-27. Programmable Modes
2. Remove the BCM PRGRM fuse from the instrument
Mode 1: Both Features Off (The interior lamps will turn
panel fuse block, located to the right of the glove
on or off at the same instant that a door is opened or
box. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95.
closed.)
3. Close the driver's door.
Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only (The interior lamps
4. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY. will stay on for about 25 seconds after all the doors
5. Count the number of chimes you hear. You will and liftgate are closed, or until you lock the doors.)
hear two to four chimes depending onthe features
your vehicle is equipped with. Refer to the chart Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only (The interior lamps will
shown previously. come on whenever you remove the key from the ignition
and stay on for about 25 seconds, or until you lock
You can now program your choices. the doors.)
To exit the programming mode, follow the steps listed
Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines
mder Exiting Programming Mode on page 2-71. hM-AP..- nnA 9 \
IVlUUzIJ
r)
L UI IU
".,
2-63
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was Automatic Door Locks
programmed in Mode 4. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since This feature allows you to customize the automatic
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which locking and unlocking of the doors when using the shift
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle lever.
to a different mode, do the following: Programmable Modes
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Automatic door locking and
Mode” earlier in this section.
unlocking is disabled. You will always need to lock
2. Turn the interior lamps on by turning the instrument your doors manually before driving to increase occupant
panel brightness control all the way up. safety.)
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number Mode 2: Automatic Door Locking Only
of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current The automatic door unlock feature is turned off.
programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change
the current mode, you can either exit the 4 Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
programming mode by following the instructions driver’s door closed; all doorswill lock automatically.
later in this section or program the next feature Mode 3: Automatic Unlocking with the Ignition Off
available on your vehicle.) Turn off the ignition with the transaxle in PARK (P);
4. Turn the interior lamps off to change the all doors will unlock automatically.
current mode. 0 Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
5. Turn the interior lamps from on to off until you hear driver’s door closed; all doors will lock automatically.
the number of chimes corresponding to the mode Mode 4: Automatic Unlocking with Transaxle in
selection you want. PARK (P)
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on; all doors
the programming mode by following the instructions will unlock automatically.
later in this section or program the next feature available * Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
on your vehicle. driver’s door closed; all doors will lock automatically.
2-64
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was Last Door Locking and Lockout
programmed in Mode 3. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since Deterrent
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
This feature allows you to customize the automatic
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
locking of the doors when exiting the vehicle.
to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Programmable Modes
Mode on page2-63.
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Doors will always lock
2. Press LOCK on the power door lock switch. immediately when you press LOCK on the power door
lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.)
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current Mode 2: Lockout Deterrent Only (If you leave your key
programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change in the ignition with the driver’s door open, you won’t
the current mode, you can either exit the be able to lock the doors with the power door locks.)
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only (If the power
door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter
available on your vehicle.)
is used to lock the vehicle while any door or the
4. Press LOCK to change the current mode. liftgate is open, you will hear three chimes. The doors
will not lock. Five seconds after the last door is
closed, all doors and the liftgate will lock.)
Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit Modes 2 and 3.)
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-65
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was Remote Driver Unlock Control
programmed in Mode 4. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since This feature allows you to customize the UNLOCK
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following: Programmable Modes
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming Mode 1: Remote All Doors Unlock (When you press
Mode on page2-63. UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter,
2. Press UNLOCK on the power door lock switch. all doors and the liftgate will unlock.)
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number Mode 2: Remote Driver’s Door Unlock Only (When you
of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry
programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change transmitter once, the driver’s door will unlock. When you
the current mode, you can either exit the press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry
programming mode by following the instructions transmitter again within five seconds, all doors and the
later in this section or program the next feature liftgate will unlock.)
available on your vehicle.)
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
4. Press UNLOCK to change the current mode. programmed in Mode 2. The mode to which the
5. Press UNLOCK until you hear the number of chimes vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
corresponding to the mode selection you want. it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit to a different mode, do the following:
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available 1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming
on your vehicle. Mode on page 2-63.
2. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
2-66
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number Remote Lock and Unlock
of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current
programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change Confirmation
the current mode, you can either exit the
This feature allows you to customize the feedback
programming mode by following the instructions
received when locking or unlocking your vehicle with the
later in this section or program the next feature
remote keyless entry transmitter.
available on your vehicle.)
4. Press UNLOCK to change the current mode. Programmable Modes
5. Press UNLOCK until you hear the number of chimes Mode 1: Both Features Off (Remote lock and unlock
corresponding to the mode selection you want. confirmation are disabled.)
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions Mode 2: Exterior Lamps Flash Only
later in this section or program the next feature available When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
on your vehicle. to lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will flash to
let you know the command has been received.
e When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock your vehicle or operate your optional
power sliding door(s), your parking lamps will flash
to let you know the command has been received.
2-67
Mode 3: Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sounds Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter programmed in Mode 4. The mode to which the
to lock your vehicle, the horn will sound and your vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
parking lamps will flash to let you know the it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
command has been received. your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock your vehicle or operate your optional 1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming
power sliding door(s), your parking lamps will flash Mode on page 2-63.
to let you know the command has been received. 2. Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Mode 4: Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sounds
(on second LOCK press) 3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change
to lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will flash to the current mode, you can either exit the
let you know the command has been received. programming mode by following the instructions
The horn will sound and your parking lamps later in this section or program the next feature
will flash if you press the LOCK button again within available on your vehicle.)
five seconds.
4. Press LOCK to change the current mode.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
5. Press LOCK until you hear the number of chimes
to unlock your vehicle or operate your optional
corresponding to the mode selection you want.
power sliding door(s), your parking lamps will flash
to let you know the command has been received. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-68
Content Theft-Deterrent System 3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current
This feature allows you to turn the content theft-deterrent programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change
on and off. the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the instructions
Programmable Modes later in this section or program the next feature
Mode 1, Mode 2 and Mode 4: Feature On (If anyone available on your vehicle.)
opens a door or the liftgate while your content 4. Turn the parking lamps on, then off to change the
theft-deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound and current mode.
your parking lamps will flash for up to two minutes.)
J. Turn the parking lamps on, then off until you hear
Mode 3: Feature Off (Your content theft-deterrent the number of chimes corresponding to the mode
system is always disarmed.) selection you want.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
programmed in Mode 2. The mode to which the the programming mode by following the instructions
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since later in this section or program the next feature available
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which on your vehicle.
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming
I I - -1- .---.- n Pr)
I V I V U ~V I ! payt: L - ~ 3 .
2-69
Arming and Disarming the Content The system will disarm when you unlock the doors
with your remote keyless entry transmitter.
Theft-Deterrent System
While this mode provides increased security, it can be a
To arm or disarm the content theft-deterrent system, the problem if your remote keyless entry transmitter is
system must be turned on by using Modes 1, 2 or 4 damaged, lost or if it fails to operate for any reason while
listed previously. the content theft-deterrent system is armed. The
content theft-deterrent system must be disarmed for the
This feature allows you to customize the arming and
engine to run while in Mode 2; your key can no longer
disarming of the content-theft deterrent system.
disarm the system.
Programmable Modes If your vehicle is equipped with the Onstar@system,
Onstar@will not be able to remotely unlock your vehicle
Mode 1: Power Door Lock Switch Arming Off if it has been programmed to Mode 2.
The system will arm when you lock the doors with
Mode 3: Standard Arming and Disarming
your key or remote keyless entry transmitter. The
key must be removed from the ignition when 0
The system will arm when you lock the doors using
you lock the doors or the content theft-deterrent either power door lock switch while any door or the
system will not arm. liftgate is open and the key is removed from the
The system will disarm when you unlock the doors ignition.
with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter. 0 The system will arm when you lock the doors with
your key or remote keyless entry transmitter and
Mode 2: Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter the key is removed from the ignition.
Arm/Disarm Only
0
The system will disarm when you unlock the doors
The system will arm when you lock the doors with with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
your remote keyless entry transmitter. The key
must be removed from the ignition when you lock
the doors or the content theft-deterrent system
will not arm.
2-70
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it 5. Press the panic button to change the current mode.
was programmed in Mode 1. The mode to which 6. Press the panic button until you hear the number
the vehicle was programmed may have been changed of chimes corresponding to the mode selection
since it left the factory. To determine the mode to you want.
which your vehicle is programmed or to program your
vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 7. Remove your key from the door key cylinder.
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
Mode on page 2-63. the programming mode by following the instructions
next in this section or program the next feature available
2. Insert your spare key fully into any door key on your vehicle.
cylinder and turn it to the unlock position.
This step is necessary to prevent accidental
programming of this feature to Mode 2. Do not Exiting Programming Mode
program this feature to Mode 2 without first reading To exit programming mode, turn the key from
Mode 2 entirely. The door key cylinder must ACCESSORY to OFF and put the BCM PRGRM fuse
remain in the unlock position during back into the instrument panel fuse block.
Steps 2 through 4.
After programming a feature, you can exit the
3. Press the button with the horn symbol on the
programming mode at anytime. Also, if your vehicle is
remote keyless entry transmitter. equipped with the content theft-deterrent system,
4. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number remember to arm the system before exiting.
of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current
programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change
the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.)
2-71
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 3.4 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators .............3.35
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3.6 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................ 3-36
Other Warning Devices ................................... 3.6 Speedometer and Odometer ........................... 3.38
Horn ............................................................. 3.7 Tachometer ................................................. 3.39
Tilt Wheel ..................................................... 3.7 Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................. 3.40
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever ......................... 3.7 Air Bag Readiness Light ................................ 3-40
Exterior Lamps ............................................. 3.15 Brake System Warning Light .......................... 3.41
Interior Lamps .............................................. 3.17 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ............. 3.42
Switchbanks ................................................. 3.20 Traction Control System (TCS)
Instrument Panel Switchbank .......................... 3.21 Warning Light ........................................ 3-43
Overhead Console Switchbank ....................... 3.21 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..... ......3.44
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3.22 Malfunction indicator Lamp ......................... 3.45
Accessory Power Outlets ............................... 3.24 Fuel Gage ................................................... 3.48
Climate Controls ............................................ 3.25 Message Center ............................................. 3.50
ClimateControlSystem ...... . . . . . . . . ....3.25
I Service Traction System Warning Message ......3.50
Outlet
Adjustment ..................... , ....3.28 Traction Active Message ................................ 3.51
Rear Climate Control System Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
(Without Entertainment System) ...............3.28 Message .................................................. 3.51
Rear Climate Control System Charging System indicator Message ................3.52
(With Entertainment System) ....................... 3.31 Low Oil Pressure Message ............................ 3-52
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3.33 Low Engine Oil Level Message ....................... 3-53
Change Engine Oil Message ...................... -3-54
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Power Sliding Door Warning Message .............3.54 Entertainment System .................................... 3-91
Door Ajar Warning Message ........................... 3.55 Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message ..................3-56 (Without Entertainment System) ...................3.98
PASS-Key@Ill Security Message .................... 3.56 Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Message .......3.57 (With Entertainment System) ..................... 3.100
Low Fuel Warning Message ........................... 3.57 Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) ............3.102
Driver Information Center (DIC) ....................... 3.58 Theft-Deterrent Feature (Non-RDS Radios) .....3.102
DVD Distortion ............................................ 3.102
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3.61 Understanding Radio Reception .................... 3.102
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-103
Data Systems (RDS) .................................. 3.61 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................ 3-104
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................. 3-104
Data Systems (RDS) .................................. 3-61 Cleaning Your DVD Player ........................... 3-104
AM-FM Radio ............................................... 3.62 Cleaning the Video Screen ........................... 3.104
Radio with CD .............................................. 3.65 Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 3.104
Radio with Cassette and CD .......................... 3-71
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................. 3-81
3-2
n /
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning
flashers button is located
on top of the steering
column.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
also let police know you have a problem. Your front signals won’t work.
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
3-6
Horn Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbols
on your steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash at a
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two normal rate even if a turn signal bulb is burned
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you out. Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly
to signal a turn or a lane change. to make sure they are working.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return Turn Signal On Chime
automatically. If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver know to
An arrow on the instrument turn it off.
panel cluster will flash in
If you need to leave the signal on for more than 3/4mile
3-9
Windshield Washer Rear Window Washermiper
Your vehicle may have a
To wash your windshield, press and hold the windshield
rear window wiper. If it
washer paddle. The washers and wipers will operate.
does, the rear window
When you release the paddle, the washers will stop, and wiper switch is located in
the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles, the instrument panel
unless your wipers had already been on. In that case, switchbank.
the wipers will resume the wiper speed you had selected
earlier.
3-10
To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is already
on, press the top of the switch with the wash symbol
on it. Press in the bottom of the switch to continue the
intermittent wiper cycle after the washing cycle is
completed. 0 Cruise control can be dangerous where
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
Cruise Control So, don’t use your cruise control on
Your vehicle may have cruise control. With cruise winding roads or in heavy traffic.
control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 0 Cruise control can be dangerous on
(40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on slippery roads. On such roads, fast
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. changes in tire tractioncan cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
25 mph (40 km/h).
slippery roads.
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
disengages.
f your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional
raction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
ine cruise corlirvi Ua& UII.
3-1 1
-1 Cru'- e Cont- I
Sex%'--
I
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want. 3. Press the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-12
Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While! Using Cruise
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed Control
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset e
it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to speed. Press the SET button at the end of the lever,
R/A (resume/accelerate) briefly. then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there. Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want,
If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep going and then release the switch. (To increase your
faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. speed in very small amounts, move the switch to
So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch R/A briefly and then release it. Each time you
at R/A. do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
faster.)
The accelerate feature will work whether or not you
have set an initial cruise control speed.
3-13
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Using Cruise Control on Hills
Control How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
There are two ways to reduce speed while using cruise upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
control: hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
Press the SET button at the end of the lever When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
until you reach the lower speed you want, a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
then release it. applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
To slow down in very small amounts, press the drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
SET button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll cruise control on steep hills.
go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Ending Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Cruise Control
Step lightly on the brake pedal, or
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
0 move the cruise switch to OFF.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-14
Exterior Lamps 0 (Off/Auto): Turning the control to this setting
will activate the automatic headlamps when it is
dark enough outside and turn off all the lamps and
lights during the day except the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
I Lamps on Reminder
If the driver’s door is opened and you turn the ignition to
The control to the left of the steering column operates sr LQcK \>,+i!~ !ngyjnn tho lamnc nn yn~I \Ail!
J -..- .-... r -
the exterior lamps. hear a warning chime.
-..I
3-1 5
Daytime Running LampdAutomatic When it’s dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will
Headlamp System come on automatically. When it’s bright enough outside,
the exterior lamps will turn off and the DRL will turn
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for on. Of course, you may still turn on the headlamps any
others to see the front of your vehicle during the time you need to.
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional you leave the garage, it will take approximately
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
first sold in Canada. change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered. The DRL as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
system will make front parking and turn signal lamps control is in the full bright position. See “Instrument
come on in daylight when the following conditions Panel Brightness Control” under Inferior Lamps
are met: on page 3-17.
The ignition is on, To idle your vehicle with the DRL and automatic
headlamps off, set the parking brake while the ignition is
the exterior lamps control is off, and in OFF or LOCK. Then start the vehicle. The DRL
the parking brake is released. and automatic headlamps will stay off until you release
the parking brake.
When the DRL are on, only your front parking and turn
signal lamps will be on. Your instrument panel won’t As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
be lit up. headlamp system when you need it.
3-16
Interior Lamps Interior Lamps Override
Instrument Panel Brightness This switch is located in
the overhead console
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located below the
exterior lamps control.
Turn the thumbwheel to the right to brighten the lights
or to the left to dim them.
3-17
Dome Lamp The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds
after all doors have been closed if they have not been
The dome lamp is located in the headliner and has locked. See “Delayed Lighting” following.
two buttons to manually turn on and off the lamp. The
dome lamp will come on each time you open a To turn the entry lighting feature off or on, see Vehicle
door, unless you turn on the interior lamps override Personalization on page 2-62.
feature. See “Interior Lamps Override” earlier in Delayed Lighting
this section.
The delayed lighting feature will continue to illuminate
Entry Lighting the interior for 25 seconds after all doors have been
With entry lighting, the interior of your vehicle is closed so that you can find your ignition and buckle your
illuminated so that you can see inside before you enter safety belt at night. Delayed lighting will not occur
your vehicle. The lamps will come on for 40 seconds while the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY. After
if you unlock your door using your key or the remote 25 seconds have passed, the interior lamps will slowly
keyless entry transmitter and the ignition is in LOCK or fade out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds
OFF. After 40 seconds have passed, the interior have passed if you:
lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will turn off before Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY,
the 40 seconds if you:
lock all doors using the remote keyless entry
0 Lock all the doors using the key, transmitter, or
0 press LOCK on the power door lock switch, or 0 lock all the doors using the power door lock switch
0 press LOCK on the remote keyless entry or the key.
transmitter. To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on, see
When any door is opened, entry lighting is cancelled. Vehicle Personalization on page2-62.
The interior lamps will stay on while any door or liftgate
is open, and slowly fade out when all doors and the
liftgate are closed.
3-18
Exit Lighting Front Reading Lamps
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for
about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from
the ignition. If you turn the ignition key to RUN or
ACCESSORY, the lamps will fade out. The lamps will
also fade out if you lock the doors with the power
door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.
When any door is opened, exit lighting is cancelled.
The interior lamps will stay on while any door or
the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out when all doors
and the liftgate are closed.
The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds
after all doors have been closed if they have not been
locked. See “Delayed Lighting’’ earlier in this section.
To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, see Vehicle
Personalization on page 2-62.
There are two reading lamps in the overhead console.
To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the lens
of the lamp. These lamps will come on each time you
open a door, unless you turn on tne interior iamps
override feature. See ”Interior Lamps Override” earlier in
this section.
3-19
Rear Reading Lamps Battery Run-Down Protection
There may be two reading lamps in the third row Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
headliner. draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the
interior lamps on. If you leave any interior lamps on
To turn on or off either reading lamp, press the lens of
while the ignition is in LOCK or OFF, they will
the lamp.
automatically turn off after 10 minutes. The lamps won’t
There is also a reading lamp in the second row, come back on again until you do one of the following:
integrated with the dome lamp. To turn on or off
Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY,
either reading lamp, press the button next to the
lamp lens. turn the interior lamps thumbwheel all the way to
These lamps will not turn on if the interior lamps the right, then slightly back to the left, or
override switch is on. See “Interior Lamps Override” open (or close and reopen) a door that is closed.
earlier in this section.
If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on
Cargo Lamp the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps
after only three minutes.
The cargo lamp is located in the rear of your vehicle,
above the liftgate opening, and does not have a switch.
The cargo lamp will come on each time you open a Switchbanks
door, unless you turn on the interior lamps override. There are two sets of switchbanks located in the front of
See “Interior Lamps Override” earlier in this section. the vehicle. The switches will vary with the options
that are on your vehicle.
3-20
Instrument Panel Switchbank Overhead Console Switchbank
@[ + REAR
3-21
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system is If children, bicycles, or pets are behind your
designed to help you park, while the vehicle is in
vehicle, RPA won’t tell you they are there. You
REVERSE (R). It operates only at very low speeds, less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help make parking could strike them and they could be injured or
easier and to help you avoid colliding with objects such killed. Whether or not you are using URPA,
as parked vehicles. The URPA system can detect check carefully behind your vehicle and then
objects up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell watch closely whenever you back up.
you how close these objects are from your rear
bumper.
Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift lever is URPA can be turned off by
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less pressing the rear park aid
than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic sensors located disable switch located
at the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to the in the instrument panel
object. The URPA display is located inside the vehicle, switchbank. When
near the rear window. It has three color-coded lights the system is disabled an
used to provide distance and system information to the indicator light will be lit
driver. on the switch. You will not
see any lights on the
rear display if the switch is
in the off position.
3-22
How the System Works When the System Does Not Seem to Work
Properly
Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). When The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
the system turns on, the three lights on the display REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
will illuminate for one and a half seconds to let you know clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
that the system is working. If your vehicle is moving in dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may
REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), affect system performance include things like the
the red light will flash to remind you that the system vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air
brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
does not work at speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
rear bumper and then driving forward at least 15 mph
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of less (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, see
than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur: your dealer.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your
liftgate during your last drive cycle, the light may
also flash red. The light will continue to flash whenever
in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven forward
at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any obstructions
behind the vehicle.
amber/amber/red lights
R continuous For cleaning instructions, see Cleaning the Outside of
flashins _.- ----
chime I I
\/.
r vu1
.. I1-1-.--1-
v e l utile uII puyt;
0-
J-VZ
3-23
Accessory Power Outlets Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
With accessory power outlets you can plug in electrical in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio. problem see your dealer for additional information
The front accessory power outlet is located below
on accessory power outlets.
the cupholder drawer. Notice: Adding some electrical equipmentto your
Pull the cover down to use the accessory power outlet. vehicle can damageit or keep other things from
When not in use, keep the cover on. working as they should. This wouldn’tbe covered by
your warranty. Check with yourdealer before
The rear accessory power outlet is located in the rear adding electrical equipment, and never use anything
compartment on the driver’s side next to the air that exceeds the amperage rating.
inflator system.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
To remove the cover, pull the tab on the cover and pull proper installation instructions included with the
it off. To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at equipment.
the back of the cover and put the cover in place. Push
down the tab to secure the cover. When not in use, Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory
always cover the rear accessory power outlet with the plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
protective cap. or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
Notice: When using an accessory power outlet, by your warranty.
maximum electrical load must not exceed20 amps.
Always turn off any electrical equipment when
not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain your battery.
3-24
Climate Controls +?(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining
air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper
Climate Control System outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for yourvehicle.
td (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear sf the
vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of
objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of
the vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and
Defrosting” later in this section.
3-25
(Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. the system to operate more efficiently.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off. For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
When the button is pressed, an indicator light will
come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes 1. Select the vent mode.
on. The recirculation mode can be used with vent 2. Select the recirculation mode.
and bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor,
3. Select A/C.
defog, defrost or outside air modes.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the air 5. Select the highest fan speed.
temperature inside your vehicle. Using these settings together for long periods of time
a A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air
the air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is
inside of your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation
pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to
mode off.
let you know that air conditioning is activated.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed water dripping underneath your vehicle whileidling
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
still maintaining the selected temperature.
3-26
Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger
There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows of remove fog from the rear window.
fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the
defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly.
a REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode. will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
(Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
and the floor outlets. When you select this mode, 10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
the system turns off recirculation and runs the again, the defogger will only run for approximately five
air-conditioning compressor unless the outside minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode. off the engine.
(@ (Defrost): Pressing this button directs most of the Nofice: Don't use anything sharp on the inside of
air to the windshield and the side window outlets, the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
with some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode, the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn't be
the system will automatically turn off recirculation covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
and run the air-conditioning compressor, unless the vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
"uisi& -,-,
ieiIJei.diuleis at ysvv to the defogger grid.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode.
3-27
Outlet Adjustment Rear Climate Control System
(Without Entertainment System)
Your vehicle may have a rear climate-control system
that allows the driver to adjust the fan speed or a
rear-seat passenger to set a separate temperature and
adjust the fan speed, for the rear-seating area. This
system works with the main climate-control system in
your vehicle.
3-28
Directing the Airflow
To direct the airflow to the rear-seating area, use the
1 2 right knob located on the main climate-control panel.
Select vent or bi-level mode to direct air to the
rear of the vehicle through the overhead outlets.
Select floor, defog or defrost mode to direct air to
the rear of the vehicle through the floor outlets.
Generally the upper outlets are used for air conditioning
and the floor outlets are used for heating.
L
Selecting the Fan Speed
These controls are overhead, on the control
panel located behind the driver’s seat. A rear-seat @ (Fan): Turn the fan knob on either rear fan control
passenger can use these controls to personally to numeral 1, 2, or 3 to increase or decrease airflow
adjust the temperature and the fan speed for the to the rear-seating area. Turn the fan knob on either rear
rear-seating area. fan control to 0 or OFF to turn off the fan.
The fan knob located on the switchbank must be turned
to R (Rear) to allow the rear-seat passengers to use
the controls located on the control panel in the
rear-seating area. Pertorming t t w action disabies tne
fan knob on the switchbank. To return control to
that knob, turn the knob out of R.
3-29
Setting the Temperature Rear Air Outlets
If the driver is adjusting the temperature, do the To increase airflow through the rear floor outlets, place
following: the left bucket seat in the second row in the forward
position. For more information, see “Seats” in the Index.
To increase or decrease the temperature for the entire
vehicle, use the temperature controls located on the The outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold air
main climate-control panel. return outlet. Be sure to keep it free from obstructions.
Also, keep the area around the base of the center
If using the main climate-control panel, then the instrument panel console, between and under the front
air-conditioning system must be on to direct cooled air seats, free of objects that could also obstruct airflow
to the rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the to the rear-seating area.
temperature in the rear of the vehicle will remain at
cabin temperature. For more information on how to use the main climate
control system, see “Climate Controls” listed previously
If a rear-seat passenger is adjusting the temperature, do in this section. For information on ventilation, see
the following: “Outlet Adjustment” also listed previously in this section.
Turn the right knob, located on the overhead rear-control
panel, behind the driver’s seat, clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or lower the temperature in
the rear-seating area only.
3-30
Rear Climate Control System
(With Entertainment System)
Your vehicle may have a rear climate-control system
that allows the driver to adjust the fan speed or a
rear-seat passenger to set a separate temperature and
adjust the fan speed, for the rear-seating area. This
system works with the main climate-control system in
your vehicle. These controls are overhead, on the control
panel located behind the front seats. A rear-seat
This knob is located below passenger can use these controls to personally
the main climate-control adjust the temperature and the fan speed for the
system on the instrument rear-seating area.
panel switchbank. Use
this knob to adjust the fan The fan knob located on the switchbank must be turned
to R (Rear) to allow the rear-seat passengers to use
speed for the rear-seat
passengers, from the the controls located on the control panel in the
rear-seating area. If this fan knob is not in R when the
front-seating area.
FAN or TEMP button is pressed, the rear control
panel will show DISABLED.
I'
3-31
Directing the Airflow If a rear-seat passenger is adjusting the fan speed, use
the following control:
To direct the airflow to the rear-seating area, use the
right knob located on the main climate-control panel. FAN: Press the FAN button on the rear control panel.
The display will show the current setting. Press the
Select vent or bi-level mode to direct air to the left and right arrow buttons to cycle through the available
rear of the vehicle through the overhead outlets. settings: OFF, LOW, MED and HIGH.
Select floor, defog or defrost mode to direct air to
the rear of the vehicle through the floor outlets. Setting the Temperature
Generally the upper outlets are used for air conditioning If the driver is adjusting the temperature, do the
and the floor outlets are used for heating. following:
To increase or decrease the temperature for the entire
Selecting the Fan Speed vehicle, use the temperature controls located on the
If the driver is adjusting the fan speed, use the following main climate-control panel.
control: If using the main climate-control panel, then the
air-conditioning system must be on to direct cooled air
@? (Fan): Turn the fan knob on the rear fan control to the rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the
located below the main climate-control system on temperature in the rear of the vehicle will remain at
the switchbank to numeral 1 , 2, or 3 to increase or cabin temperature.
decrease airflow to the rear-seating area. Turn the fan
knob on the rear fan control to 0 to turn off the fan. If a rear-seat passenger is adjusting the temperature, do
the following:
Press the TEMP button on the rear control panel. Use
the left arrow button to make the air cooler. Use the right
arrow button to make the air warmer.
3-32
Rear Air Outlets The access panel for the passenger compartment air
filter is located in the back of the glove box. Po replace
To increase airflow through the rear floor outlets, place the filter, do the following:
the left bucket seat in the second row in the forward
position. For more information, see “Seats” in the index.
The outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold air
return outlet. Be sure to keep it free from obstructions.
Also, keep the area around the base of the center
instrument panel console, between and under the front
seats, free of objects that could also obstruct airflow
to the rear-seating area.
For more information on how to use the main climate
control system, see “Climate Controls” listed previously
in this section. For information on ventilation, see
“Outlet Adjustment” also listed previously in this section.
3-33
2. Then push the tab, located on the left of the inner
access panel, to the right.
3. The first air filter will pull straight out. To remove
the second, reach in and slide it toward the
opening. Pull the second filter out.
4. Replace the filters by reversing Step 3. Make sure
the filters are inserted so that the sealing foam is
angled in the same direction on both filters. For the
type of filter to use, see Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 5-104.
5. Close the inner access door, while squeezing the
tab. Be sure it is tightly closed.
6. Snap the outer access panel into the back of the
glove box.
3-34
Warning Lights, Gages and Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
Indicators and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
locate them. when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to costly - and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages could also save you your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
or others from injury.
Your vehicle also has a message center that works
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a along with the warning lights and gages. See Message
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will Center on page 3-50.
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-35
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going! how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.
3-36
__ . .-
3-37
Speedometer and Odometer In addition to the standard odometer, the cluster can
also display two separate trip odometers (designated
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both by the letter A or B in the display window) as well
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). as your vehicle’s Engine Oil Life (designated by the
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has word OIL in the display window). The display can
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) be toggled between the odometer, the trip odometers
or kilometers (used in Canada). and engine oil life by quickly pressing and releasing
the tripheset button located to the right of the
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
temperature gage. The display toggles once each
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a time the tripheset button is pressed for less than
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to 1.5 seconds. The display toggles in the following
the mileage total of the old odometer, then that will sequence: Odometer - Trip Odometer A - Trip Odometer
be done. If it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must B - Engine Oil Life. If the engine oil life is left on the
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage display, it will automatically toggle back to the odometer
reading when the new odometer was installed. after approximately 15 seconds. Each of the two trip
odometers can be used to keep track of different
Dual Trip Odometers trip distances (for example, the mileage of a long trip
and the mileage driven on the current tank of fuel).
The trip odometers will continue to keep track of miles
I f \ (kilometers) driven even if they are not currently
displayed. To reset the odometer to zero (0), press and
hold the tripheset button for at least 1.5 seconds, but
less than three seconds. Only the trip odometer
that is showing in the display will be reset.
3-38
Retro-Active Reset Tachometer
Each of the two trip odometers has a feature called
retro-active reset. This feature can be used to set either
(or both) trip odometer(s) to the number of miles /
(kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on.
This can be used if you forget to reset your trip
2 RPM
1-
odometer at the beginning of a trip. To use the x 1000
retro-active reset feature, press and hold the tripheset
button for at least three seconds. The trip odometer
will then display the number of miles (kilometers) driven
since the ignition was last turned on and you began MESSAGE CENTER
driving. (If you use the retro-active reset feature
after you have started the vehicle, but before you begirl
moving, the display will show the number of miles
(kilometers) you drove during the last ignition cycle.)
Once you begin driving, the trip odometer will
accumulate mileage. For example, if you have driven
5.0 miles (8.0 km) since you started your vehicle, Your vehicle may have a tachometer that displays the
and then activate the retro-active reset feature, the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
display will show 5.0 miles (8.0 km). As you drive, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km). 5.2 miles Notice; Do not operate the engine with the
(8.4km), etc. Only the trip odometer that is displayed tacnometer in ine rea area, or engine aamage
will be affected by the retro-active reset so that both trip may occur.
odometers can be used separately.
3-39
Safety Belt Reminder Light Air Bag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
come on for several seconds to remind people to panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
fasten their safety belts. checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The safety belt light will The system check includes the air bag sensor, the air
also come on and stay on bag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For
for several seconds. If more information on the air bag system, see Air Bag
the driver’s belt is already Systems on page 1-93.
buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will This light will come on
come on. when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system
is ready.
3-40
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the Brake System Warning Light
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
serviced right away. will come on when you set your parking brake. The
31
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
may not be working properly.The air bags in both parts working well.
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
could even inflate without a crash.To help
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
BRAKE
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will United States Canada
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed So it LAJi!! be ready to I${Zrfi )/Cu if there’s 2
problem.
3-41
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the Light
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake Your vehicle may have this
System Warning Light on page 3-42 and lowing Your light. If it does, the
Vehicle c oage 4-32.
~
3-42
Traction Control System (TCS) If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control
Warning Light system will turn off and the warning light will come
on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction
control system will turn off and the warning light will
come on until your brakes cool down.
TRAC e If the traction control system is affected by an
OFF engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
United States Canada and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Your vehicle may have a traction control system
warning light. The traction control system warning light
may come on for the following reasons:
If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS
button located in the instrument panel switchbank
the warning light will come on and stay on. To
turn the system back on, press the button again.
The warning light should go off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 for more
information.
3-43
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
C 40
\ //
u United States
u
Canada
Cluster with Tachometer
version (United States)
Cluster with Tachometer
version (Canada)
3-44
Malfunction Indicator Lamp The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
Service Engine Soon Light in the service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent. This
United States or Check Engine Light in may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
Canada system is also designed to assist your service
technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
1 Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
SERVICE light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
ENGINE be as good and your engine may not run as
SOON smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-45
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is If the Light Is Flashing
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it The following may prevent more serious damage to
repaired. This light will also come on during a your vehicle:
malfunction in one of two ways: 0 Reducing vehicle speed.
0 Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been * Avoiding hard accelerations.
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on 0 Avoiding steep uphillgrades.
your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
diagnosis and service may be required. cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
0 Light On Steady - An emission control system If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. the Light Is On Steady” following.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle
to your dealer or qualified service center for service.
3-46
If the Light Is On Steady Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
You may be able to correct the emission system If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
malfunction by considering the following: Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
the cap. See filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing This will be detected by the system and cause the
fuel cap will allowfuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. light to turn on.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed If you experience one or more of these conditions,
should turn the light off. change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
will usually be corrected when the electrical system have your dealer or qualified service center check
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
Are you low on fuel? problems that may have developed.
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine
may not run as efficiently as designed since small
amounts oi air are sucKeu irlio iire iuei iirle wusirly
misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should
correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel
cap properly. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. It will
take a few driving trips to turn the light off.
3-47
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Fuel Gage
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
n \\'I%
'\
\\'I%
3-48
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left when the ignition is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. All
these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
0 It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up than the
4 FUEL DOOR gage reads. For example, the gage reads half full,
but it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s
capacity to fill it.
Cluster with Tachometer Cluster with Tachometer The gage pointer may move while cornering,
Version (United States) Version (Canada) braking or speeding up.
The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition
When the indicator nears empty, you still have a little is turned off.
fuel left, but you should get more soon.
If your fuel is low, the warning message in the message
center will come on. See Low Fuel Warning Message
9.n ps,np 3-52
3-49
Message Center When this message is displayed, the traction control
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
The message center is located in the instrument accordingly.
panel cluster. It gives you important safety and The message may appear for the following reasons:
maintenance facts.
e If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control
Service Traction System Warning system will turn off and the warning message will
Message come on.
e If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control
- 1 I
system will turn off and the warning message will
SERVICE come on until your brakes cool down.
TRACTION If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
SYSTEM the warning message will come on.
I 1 I If the traction control system warning message comes
United States Canada on and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle has the traction control system and this
message is displayed when you’re driving, there may
be a problem with your traction control system.
Your vehicle may need service.
3-50
Traction Active Message Engine Coolant Temperature
fl I 1
Warning Message
TRACTION HOT
ACTIVE COOLANT
I I I I TEMP
States United Canada
United States Canada
If your vehicle has the traction control system, the
TRACTION ACTIVE message will appear when the
traction control system is limiting wheel spin. You may This message will come on when your engine gets
feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. too hot.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message If this message comes on, it means that your engine
appears, so adjust your driving accordingly. The coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your
message will stay on for a few seconds after the traction vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should
control system stops limiting wheel spin. pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
Sen E.f?c$.!?!? Q!E-!?ea??g gn ,o??cJe-5-36
3-51
Charging System Indicator Message Low Oil Pressure Message
The charging system
battery symbol will come LOW
on in the message
center when you turn on OIL
the ignition as a check PRESSURE
to show you it is working.
-\
United States Canada
It will remain on as long as the engine is not running. It
should go out once the engine is running. If it stays Your vehicle is equipped with a low oil pressure warning
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a message.
problem with the charging system. it could indicate Your oil pressure message lets you know when you
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or may have a problem with your engine oil pressure.
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this indicator appears in the
message center could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the message on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.
3-52
When the engine is running and this message appears, Low Engine Oil Level Message
the engine oil level may be too low. There may also
be another problem causing low oil pressure. I
LOW
ENG OIL
LEVEL
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure low. If
~
3-53
Change Engine Oil Message Power Sliding Door Warning
Message
CHANGE
ENGINE
DOOR
OIL AJAR
United States Canada I I 1 I
3-54
Door Ajar Warning Message
I I
3-55
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message PASS-Key@111 Security Message
-7
REAR
HATCH
AJAR
United States
I C
EB Canada
This message will come on when the ignition is turned If you are ever driving and this message comes on and
to RUN or START and the rear hatch is open. stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off.
Your PASS-Keya Ill system, however, is not working
properly and must be servicedby your dealer. Your
vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key@Ill system at
this time. See PASS-Key 111 on page 2-29 for more
information.
3-56
All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Low Fuel Warning Message
Message
3-57
Driver Information Center (DIC) U M (English/Metric Button): You can change the
display to a metric or English reading at any time
by pressing E/M.
MODE: Press this button to cycle through three modes
of operation - off, compass/temperature and trip
computer mode.
Off: No driver information is displayed in this mode of
operation.
CompasdTemperature Mode: One of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature are displayed.
If the temperature is below 38°F (3”C), the temperature
reading will toggle between displaying the outside
temperature and the word ICE for two minutes.
Trip Computer Mode: In the trip computer mode,
pressing the MODE button cycles through the five
displays. Press the MODE button after the last trip
computer display to return the DIC to the OFF mode.
Your vehicle may have a DIC. If it does, the DIC will
See “Trip Computer” later in this section for more
show information about the vehicle and the
information.
surroundings.
3-58
Compass Variance Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the
compass/temperature mode. Press both the E/M and
Compass variance is the difference between magnetic MODE buttons simultaneously for approximately
north and geographic north. In some areas of the five seconds. The last entered variance zone number
country, the difference is great enough to cause the will be displayed. Press the E/M button until the proper
compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the variance number, as shown on the map, is showing.
compass variance must be set. Press the MODE button to set the new variance
zone and resume normal operation.
Setting the Variance
The display will show all the display segments briefly to
acknowledge the change in the zone number.
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the calibration process may not be complete. In
these cases the calibration symbol C will be displayed
where the compass reading is normally displayed.
To calibrate the compass, in an area free from large
metal objects, make three 360"turns. The calibration
symbol will turn off and the compass reading will
be displayed.
3-59
Manual Compass Calibration Trip Computer
If the compass appears erratic and the calibration There are five trip computer displays available by
symbol does not appear, you must manually put the pushing the MODE button. The information will appear
compass into the calibration mode. in the following order:
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the AVG ECON (Average Fuel Economy): This shows the
compass/temperature mode. Press both the E/M and average fuel economy since the last reset.
MODE buttons simultaneously for at least 10 seconds
until the calibration symbol appears. Release both INST ECON (Instant Fuel Economy): This shows fuel
buttons and complete three 360" turns in an area free economy for the most recent second of driving.
from large metal objects. The calibration symbol will turn
off and the compass reading will be displayed. RANGE (Trip Range): This shows the estimated
distance that can be traveled with the remaining fuel.
Error Displays The fuel economy used to calculate range is based
on the last few hours of driving.
An error of the vehicle's speed sensor or fuel
sender will cause -E- to be displayed. FUEL USED (Trip Fuel Used): This shows the
In the absence of vehicle communications, a dash accumulated fuel used since the last reset.
"- -" is displayed. AVG SPEED (Average Speed): This shows the
If one of these error messages appear, see your dealer. average speed since the last reset.
Resetting the Trip Computer
Press and hold the MODE and E/M buttons for at least
two seconds. The reset is acknowledged with the
display showing all segments briefly. A reset can only
be done in AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED
displays. AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED
can only be reset independently. Only the mode
that is displayed will be reset.
3-60
Audio System(s) Setting the Time for Radios without
Nofice: Before you add any sound equipment to Radio Data Systems (RDS)
your vehicle - like a tape player,CB radio, mobile Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds.
telephone or two-way radio- be sure you can Then press the HR arrow until the correct hour appears
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to on the display. Press and hold the MIN arrow until
do it properly. Added sound equipment may the correct minute appears. The time may be set with
interfere with the operationof your vehicle’s engine, the ignition on or off.
Delphi Electronics radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operationof sound equipment that Setting the Time for Radios with
has been added improperly. Radio Data Systems (RDS)
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer andbe sure to check federal rules Your radio may have a button marked with an H or
covering mobile radio and telephone units. HR to represent hours and an M or MN to represent
minutes.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with appears on the display. AM will also appear for morning
it first. Find out what your audio system can do and hours. Press and hold the minute button until the
how to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting correct minute appears on the display. The time may be
the most out of the advanced engineerinq that went set with the ignition on or off.
into it. To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
system even after the ignition is turned off. See UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not
“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under lgnition available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the
Positions onpage 2-3f . display instead.
3-61
AM-FNI Radio Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
Playing the Radio To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until you hear
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
and off. stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds and
flash the station frequency, then go on to the next
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to
decrease volume. stop scanning presets.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in
between time and radio station frequency. Time display the selected band and only to those with a strong
is available with the ignition turned off. signal.
3-62
Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone ( assnreble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to AUDIO: To adjust the bass and the treble, press and
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations release the AUDIO button repeatedly until BAS or
(six AM, six FMI and six FM2) by performing the TRE appears on the display. Then press and hold the
following steps: up or the down arrow to increase or to decrease. If
1. Turn the radio on. a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease
the treble.
2. Press AM FM to select AM, FMI or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station. To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold the AUDIO button for
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered more than two seconds until you hear a beep. B and
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you a zero or T and a zero will appear on the display.
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return. To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
either by pressing another button, causing the radio to
perform that function, or by waiting five seconds for
the display to return to time of day. Then press and hold
the AUDIO button for more than two seconds until
you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
3-63
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right either by pressing another button, causing the radio to
and the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO perform that function, or by waiting five seconds for
button until BAL appears on the display. Then press and the display to return to time of day. Then press and hold
hold the up or the down arrow to move the sound AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a
toward the right or the left speakers. beep. CEN will appear on the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear Radio Messages
speakers, press and release the AUDIO button until
FAD appears on the display. Then press and hold the up CAL (Calibration): Your audio system has been
or the down arrow to move the sound toward the front calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
or the rear speakers. appears on the display it means that your radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select be returned to the dealership for service.
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
or F and a zero will appear on the display. THEFTLOCK@ system haslocked up. You must
return to the dealership for service.
3-64
Radio with CD volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume as
necessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive. NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to
use automatic volume, select OFF.
DlSP (Display): Push this knob to switch the display
between radio station frequency and time. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.
To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and selected display will now be the default.
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
pwR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI,
or FM2. The display will show your selection.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to
decrease volume. TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic 4 SEEK b : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
select LOW, MED!UM or !-!!GH. AVOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
3-65
4 PSCAN (Preset Scan) b : Press and hold one OT Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton,
the arrows for more than two seconds and the radio the station you set will return and the bass
will produce one beep. The radio will scan to the and treble equalization that you selected will also
first preset station stored on the pushbuttons, play for a be automatically selected for that pushbutton.
few seconds and flash the station frequency, then go 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
on to the next preset station. SCAN will be displayed.
Press one of the arrows again or one of the pushbuttons Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
to stop scanning presets.
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
The radio will scan only to the preset stations that are in or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
the selected band and only to those with a strong increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
signal. or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you
may want to decrease the treble.
Setting Preset Stations
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
(six AM, six FMI and six FM2) by performing the position.
following steps:
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
1. Turn the radio on.
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2. or speaker control is displayed. You will hear one
3. Tune in the desired station. beep and the radio will display ALL. The bass and the
treble will be adjusted to the middle position.
4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station you AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
are listening to. choose bass and treble equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
stations.
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL is displayed.
3-66
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Using RDS
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to features are available for use only on FM stations that
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers. broadcast RDS information.
To adjust the fade, push and release the AUDIO @ Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
knob until FADE appears on the display. Turn the knob programming,
to move the sound toward the front or the rear receive announcements concerning local and
speakers. national emergencies,
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle display messages from radio stations, and
position, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
hold it until you hear one beep. The balance and the
fade will be adjusted t~ the middle position and the This system relies upon receiving specific information
display will show the speaker balance. from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce contact the radio station.
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position. While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
.- -I V-..I *I--
I I ~I ~t;
--I1 I-**-”- ..,:I1 __,,......__”
LI I C La11 1 c L t c l a Y V I I I apptzal V I
I LI ICZ
+hmA;--!-,,
ulayluy
;n&nqJ
I I IQLGUU
3-67
DlSP (Display): For RDS, press this knob to change BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
what appears on the display while using RDS. The allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with
display options are station name, RDS station frequency, the same program type. Press and hold BAND
PTY and the name of the program (if available). for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
Finding a PTY Station stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for
two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
1. Press the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY other stations.
will appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE
RDS Messages
LIST knob. ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press the When an alert announcement comes on the current
SEEK TYPE button to take you to the category’s radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
first station. hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
4. If you want to go to another station within that or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player
category and the category is displayed, press is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
the SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
not displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twice ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
to display the category and then to go to another broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
station. all RDS stations.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
3-68
INFO (Information): If the current station has a even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is
message, the information symbol will appear on the playing. The traffic symbol and TRAF will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The display while the announcement plays. If the compact
message may display the artist and song title, call in disc player was being used, play will stop during
phone numbers, etc. the announcement.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
appear every three seconds. To scroll through the play of a CD. Press the TRAF button. The radio will
message at your own speed, press the INFO button seek to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements.
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
the display with each press. Once the complete announcements, it will stop. TRAF will appear on
message has been displayed, the information symbol the display. When a traffic announcement comes on the
will disappear from the display until another new station that was found, you will hear it. When the
message is received. The old message can be displayed traffic announcement is over, the radio will resume play
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is of the CD. If no station is found, NO TRAF will appear
received or a different station is tuned to. on the display.
When a message is not available from a station, NO Radio Messages
INFO will be displayed.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a i ~ senlire
& w l p r ~ h fnr
station that does. When the radio finds a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. TRAF will LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
appear on the display and when a traffic announcement THEFTLOCK@ systemhas locked up. You must return
comes on you will hear it. If no station is found, NO to the dealership for service.
TRAF will appear on the display.
.. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be
when a trafiic announcement comes o n the current corrected, contact your deaier.
station or on a related network station, you will hear it,
3-69
Playing a Compact Disc 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing. at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times
to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press the normal playing speed. Release it to play the track.
DlSP or EJT. The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc 6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
Messages” later in this section. tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDMON
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
previous track if the current track has been playing number will appear on the display when each track
for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current starts to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
track has been playing for more than eight seconds, RDM OFF will appear on the display.
it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACK
and the track number will appear on the display. If
4 SEEK b : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the the current or of the previous track. Press the right
player will continue moving back through the disc. arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either of the
arrows is held or pressed more than once, the player
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track. will continue moving backward or forward through
TRACK and the track number will appear on the display. the CD.
If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the disc. DlSP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to will appear on the display. To change the default on
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this the display (track or elapsed time), push the knob until
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at you see the display you want, then hold the knob
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times selected display will now be the default.
the normal playing speed. Release it to play the track.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
3-70
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a Radio with Cassette and CD
CD is playing. The CD will stop but remain in the player.
3-71
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic Finding a Station
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, or
FM2. The display will show your selection.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as 4 SEEK b : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume as to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
necessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
drive. NONE will appear on the display if the radio selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to
use automatic volume, select OFF. 4 PSCAN (Preset Scan) b : Press and hold oneof
the arrows for more than two seconds. The radio will
DlSP (Display): Push this knob to switch the display produce one beep. The radio will scan through each of
between radio station frequency and time. Time display the preset stations stored on the pushbuttons, play
is available with the ignition turned off. for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
SCAN will be displayed. Press one of the arrows
To change the default on the display, push the knob
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
presets.
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and selected display will now be the default. The radio will scan only to the preset stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
3-72
Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
(six AM, six FMI and six FM2) by performing the increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
following steps: or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you
1. Turn the radio on. may want to decrease the treble.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FMI or FM2. To adjust bass and treble to the middle position, Push
and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
3. Tune in the desired station. one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble position.
equalization that best suits the type of station you
are listening to. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep. one beep and display ALL with the level display in
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the the middle position.
station you set will return and the bass and treble
equalization that you selected will also be AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
automatically selected for that pushbutton. choose bass and treble equalization settings designed
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical
stations.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL is
displayed.
3-73
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Using RDS
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to features are available for use only on FM stations that
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers. broadcast RDS information.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE programming,
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the receive announcements concerning local and
sound toward the front or the rear speakers. national emergencies,
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position, display messages from radio stations, and
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until seek to stations with traffic announcements.
you hear one beep. The balance and the fade will be
adjusted to the middle position and the display will show This system relies upon receiving specific information
the speaker balance. from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce contact the radio station.
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position. While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-74
DlSP (Display): For RDS, press this knob to change BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
what appears on the display while using RDS. The allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with
display options are station name, RDS station frequency, the same program type. Press and hold BAND
PTY and the name of the program (if available). for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
Finding a PTY Station stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following: two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
1. Press the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY other stations.
will appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE
RDS Messages
LIST knob. ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press the When an alert announcement comes on the current
SEEK TYPE button to take you to the category’s radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
first station. hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
4. If you want to go to another station within that or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the
category and the category is displayed, press cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play will
the SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is not stop during the announcement. You will not be able
displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twice to turn off alert announcements.
to display the category and then to go to another ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
ct2%!. hr~qrlcastcystem. This featl1t-e is not supported bv
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE all RDS stations.
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
3-75
INFO (Information): If the current station has a When a traffic announcement comes on the current
message, the information symbol will appear on the station or on a related network station, you will hear it,
display. Press this button to see the message. The even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is
message may display the artist and song title, call in playing. The traffic symbol and TRAF will appear on the
phone numbers, etc. display while the announcement plays. If the compact
disc player was being used, play will stop during
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will the announcement.
appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on play of a cassette, or CD. Press the TRAF button.
the display with each press. Once the complete The radio will seek to a station that broadcasts traffic
message has been displayed, the information symbol announcements. When the radio finds a station
will disappear from the display until another new that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop.
message is received. The old message can be displayed TRAF will appear on the display. When a traffic
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is announcement comes on the station that was found,
received or a different station is tuned to. you will hear it. When the traffic announcement is over,
the radio will resume play of the cassette, or CD. If
When a message is not available from a station, NO
no station is found, NO TRAF will appear on the display.
INFO will be displayed.
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic Radio Messages
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
station that does. When the radio finds a station that
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. TRAF will
dealership for service.
appear on the display and when a traffic announcement
comes on you will hear it. If no station is found, NO LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
TRAF will appear on the display. THEFTLOCK@system has locked up. You must return
to the dealership for service.
3-76
Playing a Cassette Tape selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds, it
will go to the beginning of the current selection.
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should Pressing this pushbutton multiple times or holding it will
face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is increase the number of selections to be searched
off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A back, up to -9.
tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is
inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the 2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds of
tape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to remove silence between each selection for next to work.
the tape and start over. Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. If you press the pushbutton more than once,
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO and the player will continue moving forward through the tape.
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The display SEEK and a positive number will appear on the
will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of display.
the tape is playing.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, first
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
press EJT or DISP.
The radio will play while the tape reverses. The
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
Messages” later in this section. You may select stations during reverse operation
-- -.. ,-
i r n t v (rreviousj; yuur iape I I I U ~ ~L l a v d
\ I - I I -1I---& LI-.---
e l I W ~ L LIIIGG using TUNE, SEEK or PSCAN.
seconds of silence between each selection for previous 4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous quickly. Press this pushbutton again to return to playing
selection on the tape if the current selection has been speed. The radio will play while the tape advances.
playing for less than three seconds. If pressed when the The station frequency and FWD will appear on
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds, the display. You may select stations during forward
it will go to the beginning of the previous seiection or operation by using TUNE, SEEK or PSCAN.
the beginning of the current selection, depending upon
the position on the tape. If pressed when the current
3-77
5 Q SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side Cassette Tape Messages
of the tape.
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
4 SEEK b : The right arrow is the same as the the radio display, the tape won’t play because of one
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the of the following errors.
PREV pushbutton. If the arrows are held or pressed The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape
more than once, the player will continue moving forward hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive open end down and try to turn the right hub
or a negative number will appear on the display. counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain in the tape may be damaged and should not be used in
player. the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player
is working properly.
TAPE CD: Press this button to play a tape when The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
listening to the radio. Press TAPE CD to switch between
the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. The The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
for future listening.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
A EJT (Eject): Press this button, located to the right cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
of the cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject may tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first. of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-103.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-78
CD Adapter Kits 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current
with your cassette tape player after disabling the track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tape player. it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACK
To disable the feature, use the following steps: and the track number will appear on the display. If
you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once,
1. Turn the ignition on. the player will continue moving back through the disc.
2. Turn the radio off.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next
3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button. The radio will track. TRACK. The track number will appear on the
display READY and flash the cassette symbol. display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will once, the player will continue moving forward through
power up the radio and begin playing. the disc.
The override feature will remain active until EJT is 3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
pressed. reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
Playing a Compact Disc six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The the normal piaying speed. Release it to play
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing. the passage. The display will show ET and the
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want elapsed time.
to insert a compact disc witn tne igniiion oii, iirsi press
DlSP or EJT. 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
Messages” later in this section. at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold
it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times
t h e nerma! p!aying speed. Re!ease it to p!ay
the passage. The display will show ET and the
elapsed time.
3-79
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the TAPE CD: Press this button to play a CD when
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON listening to the radio. Press TAPE CD to switch between
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. The
number will appear on the display when each track inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio
starts to play. Press it again to turn off random play. for future listening.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
& EJT (Eject): Press this button, located to the
4 SEEK b : The right arrow is the same as the right of the CD slot, to eject a CD. Eject may be
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may
PREV pushbutton. If either of the SEEK arrows is be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button
held or pressed more than once, the player will continue is pressed first.
moving backward or forward through the CD.
Compact Disc Messages
DlSP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time If the disc comes out or CHECK CD appears on the
will appear on the display. To change the default on display, it could be for one of the following reasons:
the display (track or elapsed time), push the knob until You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
you see the display you want, then hold the knob becomes smoother, the disc should play.
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
selected display will now be the default. It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
disc is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the
player. It is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-80
Radio with Six-Disc CD Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use automatic
volume, select OFF.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the time and the radio station frequency. Push
this knob with the ignition off to display the time.
To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
Playing the Radio and selected display will now be the default.
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on Finding a Station
and off.
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to and FM2. The display will show your selection.
decrease volume. ...-
-.I UIYE: -urrl iik ArwL iu s e -~ e ~ t
I
1 _I -1: I - L a L!
I ~ U I Uadtlu115.
- .- -
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a
feature called automatic volume. With this feature, k SEEK >I : Press the right or the left arrow to go to
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for the next or to the previous station and stay there.
road and wind noise as you drive.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected bznd and only !e those with a strong signal.
3-81
k SCAN >I : Press and hold either SCAN arrow for 4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best
two seconds until SC appears on the display and suits the type of station selected.
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning. press that numbered pushbutton, the station
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN you set will return and the equalization that you
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will selected will also be automatically selected for that
appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. pushbutton.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on your 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
to stop scanning presets.
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID or
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase
selected band and only to those with a strong signal. or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Setting Preset Stations
To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to position, select BASS, MID or TREB and push and hold
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
(six AM, six FMI and six FM2) by performing the and adjust the display level to zero.
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
2. Press AM FM to select AM, FMI or FM2. or speaker control is displayed. The radiowill produce
3. Tune in the desired station. one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
3-82
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button Using RDS
to choose between bass, midrange and treble
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk, Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
pop, rock and classical program types. System (RDS). RDS features are available for use
only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the Using this system, the radio can do the following:
AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display.
Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass,
* Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob. of Programming,
receive announcements concerning local and
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) national emergencies,
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right display messages from radio stations, and
and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL * seek to stations with traffic announcements.
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the left or the right speakers. This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers, information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the display. Turn the knobto move the sound toward the the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
front or the rear speakers. contact the radio station.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
position, select balance or tade and pusn ana noia rile - - - I#-- --I1 I-++---
I la1 I I t : VI L I IG Lair lcticlci
...;I1
VVIII U ~ J ~ ~
-17
U
VII I u,uy,uJ ..
fhn r 4 i p m l g , , incfnr~d
lu.vull
AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and will of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
adjust the display level to the middle position. time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle broadcast.
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controis are displayed. The radio will
produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on
the display.
3-83
Finding a PTY Station SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to scanning within your chosen category.
the category’s first station.
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a
4. If you want to go to another station within that particular station.
category and the category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not AM FM (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with
the category and then to go to another station. the same program type. Press and hold AM FM
5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
back to Step 1. will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold AM FM again
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic will appear on the display. The radio will not switch
announcements. to other stations. When you turn the ignition off and then
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the on again, the alternate frequency feature will
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY automatically be turned on.
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You
may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a compact disc, the last selected RDS
station will interrupt play if that selected program type
format is broadcast.
3-84
Setting Preset PTYs INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your button to see the message. The message may display
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets. the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMI and six FM2) by
performing the following steps: If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
1. Press BAND to select FMI or FM2, will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
select mode. the display with each press. Once the complete
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY. message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
The old message can be displayed by pressing
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you the INFO button until a new message is received or a
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you different station is tuned to.
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. TRAF (Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display if the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To
RDS Messages receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station,
press this button. Brackets will be displayed around
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the
When an alert announcement comes on the current tuned radio station you will hear it.
radio station, A L t H I ! w111appear on tne aispiay. k'ou wiii
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player announcements, press this button and the radio
is playing, play will stop during the announcement. will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when
v
HLtRTl wiii not be affected by tests of the e ~ e r g e n c y i: traffic ann~uncementC Q ~ on the tuned radio
" I
~ S
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
all RDS stations. TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
3-85
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
play of a CD. Press the TRAF button. The radio will displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements. disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc.
When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to play
announcements, it will stop. Brackets around TRAF will
automatically.
appear on the display. When a traffic announcement
comes on the station that was found, you will hear To insert multiple discs, do the following:
it. When the traffic announcement is over, the radio will 1. Turn the ignition on.
resume play of the CD. If no station is found, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display. 2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button for two seconds.
Playing a Compact Disc You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc right of the slot, will begin to flash.
Messages” later in this section. 3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, label
LOAD CD A : Press the LOAD side of this button to side up. The player will pull the disc in.
load CDs into the compact disc player. This compact Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing
disc player will hold up to six discs. again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green
To insert one disc, do the following: you can load another disc. The disc player takes up
to six discs.Do not tryto load more than six.
1. Turn the ignition on.
To load more than one disc but less than six, complete
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading
button.
discs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. The
turn green. radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
4. Load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the disc in.
3-86
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove
displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a the disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the
number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver.
equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated If you try to push the disc back into the receiver,
each time you play a disc. before the 25 second time period is complete, the
If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin to receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc
play automatically. several times before stopping.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the
appear on the display. LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have
tried to push it in manually. The receivers 25-second
Playing a Specific Loaded eject timer will reset at each press of eject, which
will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the
Compact Disc 25-second time period has elapsed.
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX the disc. After removing the disc, press the PWR
button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered knob off and then on again. This will clear the
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to disc-sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into
play. A small bar will appear under the CD number that the player again.
is playing, and the track number will appear.
If an error appears on the radio display, see “Compact
<< REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
pice ).&sqps” later in this .sectinn reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced voiume. Reiease ii io piay ii~epassaye.
LOAD CD A (Eject): Pressing the CD eject side of The display will show elapsed time.
this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs.
To eject the disc that is currently playing, press
FWD >> (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
and release this button. To eject multiple discs, press reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
arid hold this buttori :or :wo szconds. YG:: will he2r dispiay wiii show eiapsea time.
a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a
disc is being ejected.
3-87
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track k SEEK >I : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
or an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following: the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.
To repeat the track you are listening to, press and Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the press the button more than once, the player will continue
display. Press RPT again to turn it off. moving backward or forward through the disc.
To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and k SCAN >I : To scan one disc, press and hold either
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn it off. appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to
currently selected disc. SCAN will appear on the display.
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on
Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
one disc or on all of the discs. To use random, do one of
the following: To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCAN
To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN
random order, press and hold RDM for more than appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
two seconds. You will hear a beep and RANDOM feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each
ONE will appear on the display. Press RDM again to disc loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop
turn it off. scanning.
0 To play the tracks on all of the discs that are RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
loaded in random order, press and release the RDM current track has been playing. To change the default
button. RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. on the display (track and elapsed time), push the
Press RDM again to turn it off. knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ will now be the default.
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a
set whenever you play a compact disc. For more disc(s) is in the player.
information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed
previously in this section.
3-88
Using Song List Mode If you attempt to save more than 20 selections, S-LIST
FULL will appear on the display.
The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature called
song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
selections. One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the the order that they were saved.
following steps:
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
1 . Turn the disc player on and load it with at least SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
one disc. See "LOAD CD" listed previously in this return you to the first saved track.
section for more information.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
2. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song following steps:
list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.
If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST 1. Turn the disc player on.
button to turn it off. 2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered S-LIST will appear on the display.
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right 3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
arrow button to locate the track that you want track to be deleted.
to save. The track will begin to play. 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or two seconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beep
more seconds to save the track into memory. will be heard immediately. After two seconds of
.-.--__:.-- nrrn+;nl,nl,cl,,
P n h I P I I C T h,r++nn
When SONG LIS I ISpressed a beep wiii be nearci E." e3311ly 11 IC Q U I Y U LIU I U U L L W l I "VI ,L,, ,U"U"'J,
immediately. After two seconds of pressing two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track
SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will sound to has been deleted.
confirm that the track has been saved. After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections. are moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.
3-89
To delete the entire song list, petform the Compact Disc Messages
following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on. CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be due to one of the following reasons:
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display. You’re driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will try again.
appear on the display indicating that the song
list has been deleted. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
list again are added to the bottom of the list. error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
3-90
Entertainment System Headphones
Your vehicle may have an optional Digital Video Disc The entertainment system
(DVD) entertainment system. The entertainment system includes dual channel,
works with the vehicle’s audio system and includes a wireless headphones. The
DVD player, a video display screen, headphones and a headphones have an
remote control. The entertainment system also ON/OFF switch, a channel
integrates the rear climate control and rear seat audio A/B switch and a volume
functions. control.
3-91
If you move too far forward, step out of the vehicle or Battery Replacement
break the “line of sight” between the headphones
and the display above the video screen, the sound in To change the batteries, do the following:
the headphones will be degraded or will cut out entirely. 1. Slide open the battery door located on the left side
If the system is shut off, or the headphones are out of the headphones.
of the “line of sight” for more than three minutes,
the headphones will shut off automatically to preserve 2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
battery life. Make sure that they are installed correctly.
If the channel switch located on the right side is on A, 3. Slide the battery door shut.
the hea’dphones will play the DVD or auxiliary device. If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
See “Stereo RCA Jacks” later in this section for time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
more information. If the channel switch is on B, the dry place.
headphones will play the rear seat audio system. See
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (Without Entertainment System)
on page 3-98 or Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (With
Entertainment System) on page 3-100 for more
information.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool place.
3-92
Stereo RCA Jacks Audio Speakers
The RCA jacks are located on the faceplate of the DVD Only one audio source can be heard through the
player. They allow you to hook up an auxiliary device speakers at one time.
such as a camcorder or a video game unit. You
Audio from the radio, cassette or CD player will be
may require adapter connectors or cables to connect
heard through all speakers when the front audio system
your auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to
is being used and the rear seat audio system is off.
the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
Sound from the DVD player or an auxiliary device can
To use the auxiliary function, connect a camcorder or a
be heard through all speakers when the front audio
video game unit to the RCA jacks and turn on the
system and rear seat audio are off and a DVD or
auxiliary device. If you want to view a DVD, insert the
auxiliary device is playing.
DVD into the DVD player. The system will automatically
switch to DVD and start to play. To switch between When the front audio system is on, to hear the DVD,
the auxiliary device and the DVD, press the SOURCE auxiliary device or the rear seat audio system you must
button on the DVD player or on the remote control. use the headphones. With the rear seat audio system
See “DVD Player” and “Remote Control” later in on, the speaker in the overhead console and the
this section for more information. When the auxiliary rear speakers are muted.
device is the source for the entertainment system, The speaker in the overhead console is set at a low
TRACK 99 will appear on the radio display. level and is not intended to be heard at a high volume.
This is normal.
3-93
Video Screen To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push forward on the release button and the screen
will fold down.
2. Pull the screen toward you and adjust its position
as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen will shut off, but the DVD will
continue to play through the previously selected audio
source.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. Do not touch the video
screen. See “Cleaning the Video Screen” in the
Index for more information.
3-94
DVD Player DVD Player Buttons
SOURCE: Press this button to switch the source for the
entertainment system between the auxiliary device
(connected to the RCA jacks) and the DVD player.
Pressing this button has no effect when there is
no auxiliary device connected.
D / 11 (PIay/Pause): Press this button to start play.
Press while playing to pause. Press it again to continue
playing.
The DVD player is located in the front floor console. 0/ (Stop/Eject): Press this button to stop playing.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the Press the button a second time to eject the disc.
DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control. Playing a Disc
See “Remote Control” later in this section for more
information. To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot until it stops. The DVD player
The DVD player works while the ignition is in RUN or will continue loading the disc and the player will
ACCESSORY and while RAP is active. See “Retained automatically start.
Accessory Power (RAP)” under lgnition Positions
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
on page 2-3I . button on the face of the player or on the remote control.
The entertainment system is only compatible with DVDs e,.-,. n\/n-
ClWlIIG U V U J
+, , , . ,
,-,:II
VVlll yY
I iwL U ~ I V V v u
tn
IV IC*-& IVI .._Iu
fnnrrQrd
VI
ckin
- s w y
authorized for use in the United States and Canada. the copyright or previews. Some DVDs will begin playing
Regular audio CDs can also be played by the DVD the movie automatically after the previews have
player. Home recorded CDs (CDRs) may not play in this finished (although there may be a delay of up to
DVD player. Try the audio system CD player instead. 30 seconds). If the DVD does not begin playing the
movie automatically, press the play/pause button on the
face o i ihe DVD piayer or the remote coniroi. if the
DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions.
3-95
Stopping and Resuming Playback Remote Control Buttons
To stop a disc, press the stop/eject button on the DVD
player. To resume playback, press the play/pause
button. As long as you have not ejected the disc, it will
resume playback from the point where it was stopped.
If the disc has been ejected, the player will start playing
at the beginning of the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the stop/eject button on the DVD player once to
stop and a second time to eject the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short period
of time.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the display above Volume A : Press the up or the down arrow to
the video screen and press the desired button. increase or to decrease volume.
Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability
of the entertainment system to receive signals from ,/I1 (Play/Pause): Press this button to play a disc.
the remote control. Be sure the remote’s batteries are Press this button while a disc is playing to pause. Press
not discharged, as this will also affect the function of the it again to continue playing. If you press and hold this
remote control. Objects blocking the line of sight may button for three seconds or more, the DVD player
also affect the function of the remote control. will turn off.
Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the remote
control and would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the remote control stored in a cool, dry
place.
3-96
b Fwd/+ Rev (Fast Forward/Reverse): Press the Source: Press this button to switch the source for the
right or left arrow once to fast forward or reverse entertainment system between the auxiliary device
the DVD. To resume play, press the button again or (connected to the RCA jacks) and the DVD player.
press the Play/Pause button. Pressing and holding an Pressing this button has no effect when there is
arrow will fast forward or fast reverse the DVD and play no auxiliary device connected.
will resume when the arrow is released. These buttons
may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright Battery Replacement
or the previews.
To change the batteries, do the following:
A Next/v Prev (NextlPrevious): Press the up or the 1. Remove the screw and open the battery door
down arrow to select thenext or the previous chapter. located on the back of the remote control.
These buttons may not work when the DVD is playing
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
the copyright or the previews.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
Menu: Press this button to view the media menu. The 3. Replace the battery door and screw.
media menu is different on every disc. Use the up
and the down and the right and the left arrow buttons to If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
move the cursor around the media menu. After time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
making your selection, press Enter. Some discs may dry place.
contain a short skit leading up to the media menu.
3-97
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Rear Seat Radio Controls
(Without Entertainment System)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and
control any of the music sources: radio, cassette
tapes and CDs. However, the rear seat passengers can
only control the music sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat
passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD
through headphones, while the driver listens to the radio
through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each set of headphones.
Be aware that the front seat audio controls always
have priority over the RSA controls. If the front seat
passengers switch the source for the main radio The following functions are controlled by the RSA
to a remote source, the RSA will play the same remote system buttons:
source. The rear speakers will be muted when the
RSA power is turned on. You may operate the RSA PWR (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on or off.
functions even when the main radio is off.
VOL (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Primary Radio Controls Turn the knob to increase or to decrease volume. Push
the knob back into its stored position when you’re
The following function is controlled by the knob on the not using it. The upper VOL knob controls the upper
main radio: headphone and the lower VOL knob controls the lower
headphone.
PWR (Power): Push this knob twice to turn RSA off
3-98
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 P.SET PROG (Preset Program): The front passengers
and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening must be listening to something different for each of
to the radio, the RSA controller will not switch between these functions to work:
the bands and cannot change the frequency. Press
Press this button to scan through the preset radio
this button to play a cassette tape or a compact
disc when listening to the radio. stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on
SEEK v : While listening to the radio, press the up your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press this button
or the down arrow to tune to the next or the previous
station and stay there. The SEEK button is inactive if the again to stop scanning presets.
front radio is in use. 0 When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up or the
down arrow to hear the next or the previous selection. 0 When a CD is playing, press this button to select
The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on a disc.
the front radio is in use.
TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between playing
While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the a cassette tape or a compact disc when listening to
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go the radio. The inactive tape or compact disc will remain
back to the start of the current track (if more than safely inside the radio for future listening.
eight seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive
if the CD mode on the front radio is in use.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows until the radio goes into scan mode. The radio
will scan to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on
to the next station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning.
The scan function is inactive if front radio is in use.
3-99
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Rear Seat Radio Controls
(With Entertainment System)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and
control any of the music sources: radio, cassette
tapes and CDs. However, the rear seat passengers can
only control the music sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat
passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD
through headphones while the driver listens to the radio
through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers The following functions are controlled by the RSA
have control of the volume for each set of headphones. system buttons:
Be aware that the front seat audio controls always
have priority over the RSA controls. If the front seat RSA PWR (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on
passengers switch the source for the main radio or off. The headphone symbol will appear on the display
to a remote source, the RSA will play the same remote above the video screen when the system is on.
source. The rear speakers will be muted when the
RSA power is turned on. You may operate the RSA AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI
functions even when the main radio is off. and FM2 when the headphones are on channel B.
The selected radio station frequency will appear on the
display above the video screen. If the front passengers
are already listening to the radio, the RSA controller
will not switch between the bands and cannot change
the frequency.
3-1 00
4 (Tune) b : While listening to the radio, press the then go on to the next preset station. This feature
right or the left arrow to tune to the next or the previous will only scan the presets that are in the selected
station and stay there. These arrows are inactive if band. The selected radio station frequency will
the front radio is in use. appear on the display above the video screen.
Press this button again to stop scanning presets.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the right arrow
to hear the next selection on the tape. Press the left If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Radio
arrow to go back to the previous selection. These arrows with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player
are inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is with Radio Data System (RDS) and Automatic Tone
in use. Control, press this button to go to the other side
of the tape when a cassette tape is playing.
While listening to a CD, press the right arrow to hear If your vehicle has the AM-FM Radio with Six-Disc
the next track on the CD. Press the left arrow to go back
Compact Disc Player with Equalization and Radio
to the start of the current track (if more than eight
Data System (RDS), press this button to switch
seconds have played). These arrows are inactive if the
to playing a different CD when multiple CDs
CD mode on the front radio is in use.
are loaded into the CD player.
PSET SCAN (Preset Scan): The front passengers
must be listening to something different for each of these CD TAPE: Press this button to switch between playing
functions to work: a cassette tape, a compact disc, a DVD or an auxiliary
device when the headphones are on channel 9. If one of
0 Press and hold this button to scan through the
the devices is not loaded, the system will skip over
preset radio stations set on the pushbuttons on the the device when this button is pressed.
-!.- -1:- TI- - ..--I:- ...:I1 4-
-^ .-u^^-+ -+-4;--
I I I ~ II I I ~ U I U . I I IC I ~ U I UV V I I I y u LU 21 ~ I C D C aLatIuI
L I
3-1 01
Theft-Deterrent Feature DVD Distortion
(RDS Radios) You may experience video distortion when operating
cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position
THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theft of your Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or
radio. The feature works automatically by learning wal kie talkies.
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
not operate and LOCKED will be displayed. operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
When the ignition is off and RAP is not active, the *Excludes the Onstar@System.
blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed.
With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will not Understanding Radio Reception
operate if stolen.
AM
Theft-Deterrent Feature The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
(Non-RDS Radios) especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theft of your up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
radio. The feature works automatically by learning reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will FM
not operate and LOCKED will be displayed. FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed. Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-102
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged 3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for five
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their seconds. READY will appear on the display and a
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player. 4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN to recommended cleaning time.
indicate that you have used your tape player for
After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken tape
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this
detection feature will be active again.
message appears on the display, your cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
but you should clean it as soon as possible to cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
a reduction in sound quality, try a known good not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
quality, clean the tape player. cleaning cassette is not recommended.
For best results: IISF) a scrubbing action: non-abrasive . r I T
Aiier you ciearl ii~epiayer, press a114i lulu
I I I,.
LI~t:C J I
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
recommended cleaning cassette is available through The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator
your dealership. was reset.
The broken tape detection feature of your cassette tape Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a may aegracie over time. Aiways make sure the cassette
damaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape
from being ejected, use the following steps: player serviced.
3-1 03
Care of Your CDs and DVDs Cleaning Your DVD Player
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases When cleaning the outside DVD cabinet face and
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened with
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen clean water.
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
Fixed Mast Antenna
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals,
you should replace it.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
3-1 04
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving. the Road. and Your Vehicle ..........4-2 City Driving ................................................. -4-20
Defensive Driving ........................................... 4-2 Freeway Driving .......................................... -4-21
Drunken Driving ............................................. 4-2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................... 4-22
Control of a Vehicle ........................................ 4-5 Highway Hypnosis ........................................ 4-23
Braking ......................................................... 4-6 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................ 4-24
Traction Control System (TCS) ......................... 4-8 Winter Driving .............................................. 4-26
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ....................... 4-10 If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
Steering ...................................................... 4-10 or Snow ................................................... 4-30
Off-Road Recovery ....................................... 4-12 Towing .......................................................... 4-32
Passing ....................................................... 4-13 Towing Your Vehicle ..................................... 4-32
Loss of Control ............................................. 4-14 Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................... 4-32
Driving at Night ............................................ 4-15 Loading Your Vehicle .................................... 4-34
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17 Towing a Trailer ........................................... 4-36
4- 1
Your Driving, the Road, and the floor - makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
Your Vehicle injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
Defensive Driving your life.
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively. Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
Everyone on page 1-30. the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” every year.
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
“always expect the unexpected.” vehicle:
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to Judgment
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what Muscular Coordination
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Vision
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following Attentiveness.
distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in Police records show that almost half of all motor
both city and rural driving. You never know when vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn these deaths are the result of someone who was
suddenly. drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular 300,000 people injured.
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
4-2
Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
-.
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
0 The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker’s body weight
0 The amount of food that is consumed before and It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
during drinking the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
The length of time it has taken the drinker to or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
~ A A 1-1 I..- _ I _ - _ I_ n 4 - -_.___._I A --“---
DHb WUUlU Ut: GIUat: L U U. I L IJGILel I t . M pC13WI I
consume the alcohol.
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 Ib have a somewhat lower BAC level.
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ~ m c (I20 e ml>glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 - 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
have a lower relative percentage of body water 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
level than a man of her same body weight when drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
each has the same number of drinks. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
States is 0.04 percent.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
showers will speed that up. “1’11 be careful” isn’t the right
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
quickly the person drinks them.
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the
street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
4-4
There’s something else about drinking and driving that Control of a Vehicle
many people don’t know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash You have three systems that make your vehicle go
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who steering and the accelerator. All three systems have
has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in a to do their work at the places where the tires meet
crash, that person’s chance of being killed or the road.
permanently disabled is higher than if the person had
not been drinking.
4-7
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need If you don’t have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always technique. This will give you maximum braking while
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
though you have anti-lock brakes. feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
Using Anti-Lock anti-lock, it’s different. See “Anti-Lock Brakes.”
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a even the very best braking.
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but
this is normal. Traction Control System (TCS)
Braking in Emergencies Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that requires hard braking. that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the
the system works the front brakes and reduces engine
same time. However, if you don’t have anti-lock, power to limit wheel spin.
your first reaction - to hit the brake pedal hard and
hold it down - may be the wrong thing to do. Your The TRACTION ACTIVE message will come on when
wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can’t the traction control system is limiting wheel spin.
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in See Traction Active Message on page3-51. You may
whatever direction it was headed when the wheels feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very
thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
4-8
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
control will automatically disengage. When road is required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” under If You Are
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-30.
reengage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. To turn the system off,
I I I I press the TCS button
located on the instrument
SERVICE panel switchbank.
TRACTION
SYSTEM
’ United States
I
Canada
I
4-9
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System Steering
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD Power Steering
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to If you lose power steering assist because the engine
slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
the vehicle as required. There may be a slight it will take much more effort.
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
Steering Tips
During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque may
be reduced to protect AWD system components. If Driving on Curves
the vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWD usage, It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
the AWD system will shut itself off to protect the
system from overheating. When the system cools down, A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the AWD system will activate itself again automatically; the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
this cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
on outside temperature and vehicle use. See All-Wheel the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
Drive Disable Warning Message on page 3-57. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can
control.
4-10
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Steering in Emergencies
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems - steering and braking - have to do their There are times when steering can be more effective
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
braking can demand too much of those places. You can out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
lose control. parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
The same thing can happen if you’re steering can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop
through a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
Those two control systems - steering and That’s the time for evasive action - steering around the
acceleration - can overwhelm those places where the problem.
tires meet the road and make you lose control. See
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8.
these. First apply your brakes.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
you want it to go, and slow down. speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should on the space available.
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate iintil you are ollt Gf the curve, and the!?
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-1 1
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
are rolling, you will have steering control. impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-15
Here are some tips on night driving. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night.
Drive defensively. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they
also make a lot of things invisible.
Don’t drink and drive.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
glare from headlamps behind you. seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
down and keep more space between you and
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
other vehicles.
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much
In remote areas, watch for animals. worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
and rest. making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
as we get older these differences increase. A roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
What you do in the daytime can also affect your checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and
Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. aren’t even aware of it.
4-16
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left,
you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go
slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
4-17
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
Pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
going through some car washes can cause problems, you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before yo11 Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if
hit them.
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple’’ the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
4-18
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. e Turn on your low-beam headlamps - not just your
parking lamps - to help make you more visible to
Driving Through Deep Standing Water others.
e Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in distance. And be especially careful when you
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
your engine. Never drive through water thatis room ahead, and be prepared to have your
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.If view restricted by road spray.
you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, e Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
drive through them very slowly. on page 5-60.
Driving Through Flowing Water
4-1 9
City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
4-20
Freeway Driving At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly Over Your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, move slightly slower at night.
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
The most important advice on freeway driving is: not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-2 1
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. Here are some things you can check before a trip:
The exit speed is usually posted.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservior full?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not Are all windows clean inside and outside?
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
going slower than you actually are. Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
must start when you’re not fresh - such as after a day’s trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes recommended pressure?
you can easily drive in. e Weather Forecasts:What’s the weather outlook
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it along your route? Should you delay your trip a
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs short time to avoid a major storm system?
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, e Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
you’ll find experienced and able service experts
in dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
4-22
Highway Hypnosis What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Is there actually such a condition as “highway Then here are some tips:
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
whatever. comfortably cool interior.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the instruments frequently.
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
let it happen to you! if it does, your vehicle can leave service or parking area and take a nap, get some
the road in less than a second, and you could crash and exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
be injured. on the highway as an emergency.
4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when yougo
m a steep or lo hill.
di-~-
4-24
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or
to do all the workof slowing down. They could
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
get so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You that let you stay in your own lane.
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
have your engine running and your vehiclein could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
gear when you go downhill.
@ You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-25
Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-26
Driving on Snow or Ice What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the road probably have good traction. the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to crews can get there.
be very careful. Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow - drive with caution.
If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. But you can turn the traction system off if
you ever need to. You should turn the system off if
your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-30. Even though your vehicle has a traction
system you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving
to the road conditions. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-8.
If you don’t have a traction system, accelerate gently.
Tr; !?e? ?ebre& the cJe!?t!e tr2,Ctlen. !f \’E ,cce!er=rte !x
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
4-27
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,
see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking
system or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes,
if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to
get the most traction you can.
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you’ll just slide. Brake
so your wheels always keep rolling and you can still
steer.
Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass serious situation. You should probably stay with
may remain icy when the surrounding roads your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden and your passengers safe:
steering maneuvers.
Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-28
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
floor mats - anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. monoxide) gas to get inside. CQ could
overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any thatis
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to timeto be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-29
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost I
4-30
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
“‘Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.” has traction control, you should turn your traction
control system off. See Traction Control system (TCS)
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, on page 4-8. Then shift back and forth between
see Tire Chains on page 5-67. REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out.
see “Towing Your Vehicle” following.
4-31
Towing With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Towing Your Vehicle Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5. Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle recommendations.
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
Do you have the proper towing equipment?
Recreational Vehicle Towing See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome. Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
The two most common types of recreational vehicle would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on page 4-22.
the ground and two wheels up on a device know as
a “dolly”).
4-32
Dinghy Towing Dolly Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed
wheels on the ground. If you have a two-wheel-drive with two of its wheels on the ground. To dolly tow
vehicle, it can be towed with two of its wheels on your vehicle, do the following:
the ground. See “Dolly Towing” following. If you have an 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. It can be towed with car carrier 2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
equipment. 3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of position with a clamping device designed for towing.
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain 5. Release the parking brake.
components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will beon the ground. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be
towed with car carrier equipment.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
4-33
Loading Your Vehicle The Certificationflire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles,called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
4-34
If you put things inside your vehicle - like suitcases, Automatic Level Control
tools, packages, or anything else - they will go as fast
as the vehicle
._
goes. If you have to stop or turn On vehicles equipped with the automatic level control,
quickly, o there is a crash, they’ll keep going. the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept level as you
load or unload your vehicle. However, you should still
not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR.
If the engine is running or the ignition key is in
ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike (RAP) is active, you may hear the compressor operating
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or when you load or unload your vehicle, and periodically
in a crash. as the system self-adjusts. This is normal. See
Put things in the cargo area of your “Retained Accessory Power” under lgnition Positions on
vehicle. Try to spreadthe weight evenly. page 2-31.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
The compressor should operate for brief periods of time.
inside the vehicleso that some of them If the sound continues for an extended period of time,
are above the topsof the seats.
your vehicle needs service.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle. Using heavier suspension components to get added
0 When you carry something inside the durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
vehicle, secure it whenever you can. dealer to help you load your vehicle the right away.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
4-35
Towi7g a Trailer Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should
~~
4-36
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer 0 the weight of the trailer tongue
If you do, here are some important points: and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
e There are many different laws, including speed limit Weight of the Trailer
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live How heavy can a trailer safely be?
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for It should never weigh more than 1,400 Ibs. (630 kg) with
this information can be state or provincial police. up to six occupants in the vehicle or more than
e Consider using a sway control if your trailer will 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg) with up to two occupants. If you
weigh 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg) or less. You should have the optional trailer towing package, your vehicle
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh can tow up to 2,900 Ibs. (1 300 kg) with up to
more than 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg). You can ask a six occupants or up to 3,500 Ibs. (1 575 kg) with up to
hitch dealer about sway controls. two occupants. But even that can be too heavy.
e Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
axle or other parts could be damaged. temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
e Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at or advice, or you can write us at:
the heavier loads. Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
e P.O. Box 33170
You can use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle
in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize In Canada, write to:
heat buildup and extend the life of your transaxle. General Motors of Canada Limited
Three important considerations have to do with weight: Customer Communication Centre, i63-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
e the weight of the trailer, Oshawa, Ontario L I H 8P7
4-37
Weight of the Trailer Tongue If you’re using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
to measure because it affects thetotal or gross weight Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) for your vehicle.
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be right simply by moving some items around in the
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle trailer.
on page 4-34 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity. Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certificationflire label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
A B
4-38
Hitches Safety Chains
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. You should always attach chains between your vehicle
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
are some rules to follow: contacting the road if it becomes separated from
e The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
bumper. attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
weigh more than 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg), be sure to safety chains to drag on the ground.
use a properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment Trailer Brakes
is very important for proper vehicle loading If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 Ibs. (450 kg)
and good handling when you’re driving.
loaded, then it needs its own brakes - and they must be
e Will you have to make any holes in the body of adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when adjust and maintain them properly.
you remove ?ne niicn. ii you aon‘i seai illern, Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes, do not
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.
on page 2-42. Dirt and water can, too.
4-39
..
Driving with a Trailer
- -
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
If you have a rear-mo window open an-. you responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
unconsciousness or death. See “Engine electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
Exhaust” in the Index.To maximize your safety then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
when towing a trailer: sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
starting on your trip. load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
Keep the rear-most windows closed. brakes are still working.
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rearor another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle.Do not use
the comfort control setting for maximum
air because it only recirculates the air
inside your vehicle.See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
4-40
Following Distance Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as Nofice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
This can help you avoid situations that require vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
heavy braking and sudden turns. making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the advance.
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Backing Up When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. extra wiring.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
have someone guide you. you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will tlash tor turns even ii the buibs on ine traiier
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-41
Driving on Grades Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than . really should notpar‘ourvehicle,with a
1,000 Ibs. (450 kg), you may prefer to drive in THIRD (3) trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) (or, as you wrong, your rig could start to move. People
need to, a lower gear). This will minimize heat build-up can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
and extend the life of your transaxle. trailer can be damaged.
4-42
When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Parking on a Hill Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
while you: on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
0 start your engine, engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake system.
shift into a gear, and Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
0 releasethe parking brake. it’s a good idea to review these sections before you
2. Let up on the brake pedal. start your trip.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks. Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle has a trailer wiring harness located at the
rear of your vehicle. To use the trailer wiring harness
you need a converter kit. Contact your dealer for more
information.
4-43
P
P
P
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Engine Coolant ............................................. 5-23 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-66 .
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................. 5-26 Wheel Replacement ...................................... 5-66
Engine Overheating ....................................... 5.26 Tire Chains .................................................. 5-67
Cooling System ............................................ 5-29 Accessory Inflator ......................................... 5-68
Pewer Steering Fluid ......................
~ .......................
~ ~ ~ ~ 5-37 If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................ 5-69
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................ 5-38 Changing a Flat Tire ..................................... 5-70
Brakes ........................................................ 5-40 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 5-85
5- 1
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
~~
5-2
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported sewice people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
5-3
Doing Your Qwn Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this You can be injured and your vehicle could be
manual can. To order the proper service manual, damaged if you try todo service work on a
see Service Publications Ordering Information on vehicle without knowing enough aboutit.
page 7-9. Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting experience, the proper replacement parts
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air and tools before you attemptany vehicle
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1- 102. maintenance task.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
the mileage and the date of any service work you other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-19. fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, partscan later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Fuel Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
proper maintenance of your vehicle. which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better
Gasoline Octane vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane meeting these specifications could provide improved
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may driveability and emission control system performance
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this compared to other gasoline.
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage In Canada, look for the
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate “Auto Makers’ Choice”
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not label on the pump.
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
TW
Canada Only
5-5
California Fuel Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it system and also damage the plastic and rubber
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states warranty.
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
emissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive
specifications, but emission control system performance
called methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-45 )
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
the performance of the emission control system may
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
by your warranty.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States Fuels in Foreign Countries
are now required to contain additives that will help
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
allowing your emission control system to work
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
covered by your warranty.
available in your area to contribute to clean air.
General Motors recommends that you use these To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
gasolines, particularly if they comply with the contact a major oil company that does business in the
specifications described earlier. country where you’ll be driving.
5-6
Filling Your Tank
5-7
you get fuel on yourself and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan
spray out on youif you open the fuel cap too
quickly. This spray can happenif your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hotweather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait forany
“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.
5-8
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right Filling a Portable Fuel Container
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-45. Never fill a portable fuel con..--ner w....e it is - - I
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
The malfunction indicator lamp (SERVICE ENGINE
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
SOON or CHECK ENGINE light) will come on if the fuel
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
cap is not properly installed.
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get you and others:
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. 0 Dispense gasoline only into approved
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. containers.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp Do not fill a container whileit is inside a
to light and may damage your fuel tank and vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
emissions system. See “Malfunction Indicator on any surface other than the ground.
Lamp” in the Index. 0 Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
5-9
Checking Things Under Hood Release
the Hood To open the hood, do the following:
5-10
4. Pull forward on the hood prop to release it from its Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
storage clip. on properly. Then follow these steps:
The hood prop may be hot due to increased engine
1. Lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop.
temperatures under the hood, so be careful
when handling it. Use your hood prop sleeve when 2. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood.
handling the hood prop. 3. Return the prop to its retainer.
5. Put the end of the 4. Let the hood down and close it firmly.
hood prop into the slot
in the underside of
the hood.
5-1 1
z rn
5 S
(D
3
Y
0
C
5
0
0
Q
v)
(D
(D
3
%
(D
A. Underhood Fuse Block ngine Oil
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
D. Radiator Pressure Cap LOW
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir ENG OIL
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap LEVEL
G. Engine Oil Dipstick
H. Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
United States Canada
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter If the low engine oil level message appears on the
K. Engine Coolant Reservoir instrument cluster, it means you need to check your
engine oil level right away. For more information,
see Low Engine Oil Level Message on page 3-53.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
5-13
Checking Engine Oil Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you dipstick might not show the actual level.
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
The engine oil dipstick is keeping the tip down, and check the level.
located at the front of the
engine compartment,
near the center. The
dipstick handle has a
bright, yellow loop design
for easv identification.
See Eigine Compartment
Overview on page 5- 12
5-14
When to Add Engine Oil The engine oil fill cap is
located behind the engine
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip oil dipstick. See Engine
of the dipstick, then you’ll need to add at least one Compartment Overview on
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part page 5-12 for more
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase information on location.
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5- 102.
Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched
area. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re
through.
5-15
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY 6RADEENGINE OILS
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol. HOT
WEATHER
I
7
If you choose to perform "F "C
the engine oil change
I
L
service yourself, be sure + 100 - + 38
5-16
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the When to Change Engine Oil
only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle. You
should look for and use only oils which have the API (GM Oil Life System)
Starburst symbol and which are also identified as Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils, when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
you can use an SAE IOW-30 oil which has the API based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
Starburst symbol, if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C) and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
SAE IOW-40 or SAE 2OW-50 under any conditions. vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
Notice: Use only engine oil with the American properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines changed.
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended When the system has calculated that oil life has been
oil can result in engine damage not covered by diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
your warranty. necessary. A change engine oil message will come on.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
your vehicle. two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over
temperature falls below -20°F (-29"C), it is a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 changed at least once a year and at this time thesystem
synthetic 011or an SAE uvv-XI oii. Botn wiii provide must be reset. It IS aiso important to cneck your oii
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine regularly and keep it at the proper level.
at extremely low temperatures.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
Engine Oil Additives change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
Don't add anything io your Oii. The recommended oils whenever the oii is changed.
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for
good performance and engine protection.
5-17
How to Reset the Change Engine Oil What to Do with Used Oil
Message Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
change engine oil message being turned on, reset warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
the system. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
1. With the ignition key in RUN but the engine off, change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
repeatedly push the tripheset button until OIL is filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
2. Once OIL is displayed, push and hold the tripheset streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
button for five seconds. The number will disappear taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
and be replaced by 100 (indicating 100% oil life problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
remaining). your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the change engine oil message comes back on, the Engine Air CleanedFilter
engine oil life monitor has not reset. Repeat the
procedure. The engine air cleaner/filter is located at the front of the
engine compartment, on the driver’s side of the
vehicle, under the engine coolant reservoir. See Engine
Comparfment Overview on page 5- 12 for more
information on location.
5-18
Checking or Replacing the Engine Air 5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the panel
with the slots at the bottom of the housing.
CleanedFilter
6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place. If the
panel moves easily, check that the tabs are seated
correctly in the slots.
7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps.
5-19
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
When to Check and Change fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure
level is when the engine oil is changed. to get an accurate reading if you check your
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles transaxle fluid.
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
more of these conditions: fluid level if you have been driving:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
At high speed for quite a while.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
0 While pulling a trailer.
0 Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these (82°C to 93°C).
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km). Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (IOOC), you may have to
page 6-4.
drive longer.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
5-20
Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
e Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
e With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
e With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
e Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
5-2 1
The dipstick has a bright, red loop design for easy How to Add Fluid
identification. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Part D:
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-17.
paper towel.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the
then pull it back out again.
dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t ovetfj//.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-Ill, because fluid with that label is
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the made especially for your automatic transaxle.
lower level. The fluid level must be in the Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@-Ill is
cross-hatched area. not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
dipstick back in all the way. described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
5-22
Engine Coolant Protect against rust and corrosion.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with Help keep the proper engine temperature.
DEX-COOL@engine coolant. This coolant is designed 0 Let the warning messages and gages work as they
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles should.
(240000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL@ extendedlife coolant. Notke: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to If coolant other than DEX-COOL@is added to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem the system, premature engine, heater core or
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
page 5-26. coolant will require change sooner -- at 30,000miles
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
DEX-COOL@coolant will: Damage caused by the useof coolant other
than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). warranty.
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
5-23
What to Use If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable wafer and
one-half DEX-COOL@coolant which won't damage Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don't
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
you don't need to add an1"":ng else. to improve the system.These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant
reservoir is located on the
Adding only plain water to your cooling driver's side of the
system can be dangerous. Plainwater, or vehicle, above the engine
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil air cleanedfilter. See
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your Engine Compartment
vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
location.
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn't get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
drinkable water and DEX-COOL@coolant. engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is
warm, the level should be above the FULL COLD mark
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, or a little higher.
your engine could overheat and be badlydamaged.
The repair cost wouldn't be covered by your
warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
5-24
Adding Coolant Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
5-25
Radiator Pressure Cap Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Notice: Your radiator cap is a pressure-type cap
loss
and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
and possible engine damage from overheating. be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
overflow tube on the radiator filler neck. protection mode which alternates firing groups of
The radiator pressure cap is located at the front of the cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on performance. The temperature gage will indicate
page 5-12 for more information on location. an overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles
(km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
Engine Overheating
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on protection operatingmode, to avoid enginedamage,
your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine allow the engine tocool before attempting any
Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-44. You repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
also have an engine coolant temperature warning Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and
message on your instrument panel. See Engine Coolant reset the oil life system. See “Engine Oil” in the
Temperature Warning Messageon page 3-5 1. Index.
5-26
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
I
t
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if yousee or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle untilit cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving
to a safe place inan emergency.
5-28
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hooa
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-29
and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engineif there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an enginefire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
5-30
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency. Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant. some other liquid suchas alcohol, can boil
If coolant other than DEX-COOL@is added to before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
the system, premature engine, heater core or vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
coolant will require change sooner - at 30,000 miles wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other Your engine could catch fire and you or others
than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle could be burned. Use a 50/50mixture of clean,
warranty. drinkable water and DEX COOL@coolant.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
isn’t at or above the FULL COLD mark, add a Use the recommended coolant and the proper
rntrn :
. -I.+:.-~~-L-,-
-1 -I ~ ..,- +,,,n,r
J v p ~ @
3 W 3 W I IIIXLUlt: V I C l t S d f I , u l l l l n a ~ l ev v a t c f a
1 IU UL/\-WUUL
~ l
---I--&
bwuIaI IL
-:.,+.*.=#.
IIIIALUI G.
5-31
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-32
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
-- --
pressure cap even a little they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure capto cool if you ever have
to turn the pressurecap.
5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator
fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
I
5-34
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
engine cooling fans. filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the arrows on the pressure cap line up with the
7 . By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
vent tube.
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL@coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
5-36
Power Steering Fluid
5-37
When to Check Power Steering Fluid What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6- 17.
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir location. Windshield Washer Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then be operating your vehicle in an area where the
remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
dipstick. sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir
When the engine compartment is hot, the level should location.
be at the H (hot) mark. When it’s cold, the level
should be at the C (cold) mark. If the fluid is at the ADD
mark, you should add fluid.
5-38
Adding Washer Fluid Notice:
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
e Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solutionto freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system.Also, water doesn’t
clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it’s very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank ifit is completely full.
e Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze)in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
5-39
Brakes the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that
fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
Brake Fluid should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
5-40
BRAKE With the wrolly kind of fluid yo^. brake
ltl
5-41
Brake Wear Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum
brakes. Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads your brakes.
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
.
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
brake pedal firmly). the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
5-42
Brake Pedal Travel Battery
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in ACDelco@battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco@
Brake Adjustment battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the page 5- 12 for battery location.
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear. Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
Replacing Brake System Parts chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many handling.
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When youreplace parts of your braking
system - for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in - be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If
you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
exampie, it someone puts in brake iinings inai are
wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front
and rear brakes can change - for the worse. The
braking performance you’ve come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
5-43
Vehicle Storage Jump Starting
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or If your battery has run down, you may want to use
more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
the battery. This will help keep your battery from vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
rrlnrling down.
On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding
door, a low-voltage battery or replacing a battery
may cause the system to become inoperative. See
Power Sliding Door(PSD) on page 2-17for more
information.
B a t L i e s ha,, acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt. Batteries can hurtyou. They can be dangerous
because:
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your They contain acid that can burn you.
vehicle for longer storage periods. They contain gas that can explode or
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent ignite.
0 They contain enough electricity to
Feature (RDS Radios) on page 3-102 or Theft-Deterrent
Feature (Non-RDS Radios) on page 3- 102. burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurtyou.
5-44
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
by your warranty. your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle. unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt lighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn off
battery with a negative ground system. the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system could save your radio!
with a negative ground, both vehicles can be 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
damaged. positive (+) and negative (-) terminal locations on
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables each vehicle.
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching You will not need to access your battery for jump
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+)
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to jump starting terminal for that purpose.
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-45
The terminal is located
under a tethered cap at
the front of the underhood
fuse block. See Engine
Compartment Overview on Using a match near a battery can cause battery
page 5- 72 for more gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
information on location. this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You
don’t need to addwater to the ACDeIco@
battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid isthere. If it is low, add water
Squeeze the tabs and pull up on the cap to access to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive
the remote positive (+) terminal. You should gas could be present.
always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead
of the positive (+) tm-ninal on your battery. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
1 your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
P electric I canstartupeven
’ wher .re
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-46
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure battery. Use a remote
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving positive (+) terminal
parts once the engine is running. if the vehicle has one.
5-47
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next The electrical connection is just as good there, and
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, is much less.
unpainted metal part, or to a remote negative (-)
terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (-) 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
cable at least 18 inches it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
(45 cm) away from service.
the dead battery, but
not near engine Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from
parts that move. electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
5-48
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
L ~~~~ ~
5-49
All-Wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
However, they have two additional systems that
need lubrication.
5-50
Carrier Assembly-Differential To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
(Rear Drive Module)
When to Check and Change Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it
Part A: Scheduied Maintenance Services on page 6-4. repaired, if needed.
How to Check Lubricant What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Nuids and Lubricants on page 6- 17.
5-51
Bulb Replacement Headlamps
For the type of bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on 1. Open the hood.
page 5-57.
2. Remove the front turn signal/parking lamp
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this assembly. See Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
section, contact your dealer. Parking Lamps on page 5-54.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
Halogen Bulbs
I
5-52
6. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up the
blue tabs and pulling the bulb out.
5-53
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
1. Open the hood.
5-54
Front Turn SignalParking Lamp Front Sidemarker Lamp
5-55
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp housing
on the inboard side.
3. Pull off the entire taillamp housing.
The locator/retaining pins on the outboard side are
part of the lamp assembly and will remain intact
during removal.
Replacement Bulbs
For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.
5-57
Windshield Wiper Blade To remove the windshield wiper blade(s):
1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting.
Replacement
2. Turn the ignition to OFF while the wipers are at
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least the outer position of the wipe pattern.
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check‘‘ in At Least Twice a Year on page 6-1 1 for more 3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
information. windshield or backglass.
Replacement blades come in different types and are 4. While holding the wiper
removed in different ways. For proper type and length, arm away from the
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on glass, push the release
page 5- 104. clip from under the
blade.
5-58
5. Push the release clip at the connecting point of the
blade and the arm up. Then pull the blade assembly
down toward the glass to remove it from the
wiper arm.
6. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip “click into
place.
7. Push the release clip, from Step 4, down to secure
the wiper blade into place.
5-59
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions r
- .lderin- ted tires pose thesame danger
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
~ ~~
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure shouldbe checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
are dangerous. impact - such as when you hit a pothole.
Overloading your tires can cause ~
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
overheating as a result of too much Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
friction. You could have an air-out and a I yourtread is badlyworn,or if yourtires
serious accident. See “Loading Your have been damaged, replace them.
Vehicle” in the Index. I
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-60
Inflation -- Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of Unusual wear
the driver’s door, showsthe correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. ‘Cold” means your 0 Badhandling
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven Roughride
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
0 Needless damage from road hazards
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires When to Check
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following: Check your tires once a month or more.
Too much flexing Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa).
Too much heat
0 Tireoverloading
How to Check
Bad wear Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
0 Badhandling simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
0 Bad fuel economy properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
*.Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
I-.
I ney ileip prevel li ieaks uy
--
. I. __
._ :.-
K G ~ ~ a1
IYI UUL
I
.1 A : . A
UII
--..I
IU
moisture.
5-61
Tire Inspection and Rotation When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12 500 km).
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time rear inflation pressures as shown on the
for New Tires on page 5-63 and Wheel Replacement CertificationiTire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
on page 5-66 for more information. are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and .qnWfications on page5-ffl2.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire, If it moves,
use the folding wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation Rust or dirt on awheel, or 01. -he parts to
is the most important. See “Part A: Scheduled which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
Maintenance Services,” in Section 6, for scheduled become loose after a time. The wheel could
rotation intervals. come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a clothor a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust ordirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
5-62
When It Is Time for New Tires You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
One way to tell when it’s You can see the indicators at three or more places
time for new tires is to around the tire.
check the treadwear 0 You can see cord or fabric showing through the
indicators, which will tire’s rubber.
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
(1.6 mm) or less of tread deep enough to show cord or fabric.
remaining. The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-63
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, or types (radial and bias-beltedtires), the
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way vehicle may not handle properly,and you
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed could have a crash. Using tiresof different
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
traction, ride and other things during normal service on Be sure to usethe same size and type tires on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow). compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle.See “Compact Spare
If you ever replace your tires with those not having Tire” in the index.
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same I
If youuse as resonyourvehicle,the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracksafter
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing crash.
a Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
conditions on a specified government test course.
section width. For example:
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A a half (1 5 ) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
The following information relates to the system depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
developed by the United States National Highway however, and may depart significantly from the norm
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. differences in road characteristics and climate.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most Traction - AA, A, B, C
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches conditions on specified government test surfaces of
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
While the tires available on General Motors passenger traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
grades, they must also conform to federal safety traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
requirements and additional General Motors Tire cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-65
Temperature - A, B, C Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
The temperature grades are A (the highest), 6, and C, your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor may need to be rebalanced.
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to Wheel Replacement
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
level of performance which all passenger car tires must or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
minimum required by law. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
excessive loading, either separately or in combination, the same way as the one it replaces.
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced for your vehicle.
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
5-66
Used Replacement Wheels
5-67
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may have an air inflator. With it, you can
inflate things like air mattresses and basketballs,
and you can also use it to bring your tires up to the Inflating somethir too muchcanmakeit
proper pressure. explode, and you or others could be injured.
The air inflator is located in the rear compartment on Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
the driver’s side. To remove the cover, pull the tab inflate any object only to its recommended
on the cover and pull it off. pressure.
5-68
If the air inflator system does not turn on or the light If a Tire Goes Flat
does not come on, the fuse may be blown or installed
incorrectly. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
page 5-95 or see your dealer for service. especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out
Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
10 minutes. The light in the switch will blink. After about a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
one minute you can use the system again. Press the
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
inflator switch and the indicator light will come on.
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
Notice: Don’t run your air inflator for longer than accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
30 minutes at one time. If you do, you may damage Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
the system. a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
After running the air inflator for 30 minutes, wait at least
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
10 minutes before restarting the air inflator. in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
To turn off the inflator, do the following: accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
1. Press the switch and detach the hose, first from the very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
inflated object, then from the outlet. brake to a stop - well off the road if possible.
2. Put the protective cap back on. If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
iacking ~q~liprnent to chance a flat tire safely.
3. Piace ine iniiaior kii ioois irl ii~ep u u d I, ar ~ i isiwl-eiir
the glove box.
To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the back of
the cover and put it in place. Push down the tab to
secure the cover.
5-69
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
5-70
Removing the §pare Tire and Tools
The tools you’ll need are
located in the storage
compartment at the rear of
i
1 the vehicle, on the
~ passenger’s side.
D
G F u E
5-71
B
-C
C
5-72
4. If your vehicle is an all-wheel-drive vehicle, after
removing the compact spare tire turn the wrench
clockwise to raise the cable back up.
On an AWD vehicle, you can not store a full-size
tire under the vehicle. It should be stowed inside the
vehicle by the cable provided. See “Storing the
Flat Tire on an All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” later in this
section.
If you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the hoist is
used to store a full-size or a flat road tire under
the vehicle. See “Storing the Spare Tire and Tools”
and “Storing the Flat Tire on a Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle” later in this section.
If the compact spare tire will not lower, check under the
vehicle to see if the tire is hanging loose and the
cable end and spring under the wheel plate are missing.
If so, the secondary latch system is engaged. See
“Secondary Latch System” later in this section.
3. To remove the compact spare tire from the cable,
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable so it can be To continue changing the flat tire see “Removing the
pulled up through the wheel opening. Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” later in this
cectlx!.
5-73
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle may have an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It’s designed to stop a tire from suddenly falling off your Before beginning this procedure read all the
vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged.
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
For the secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed
with the valve stem pointing down. instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt.Read and
Front-wheel-drive vehicles use the underbody tire hoist follow the instructions listed below.
assembly to store either the compact spare or a flat
road tire. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” in
the Index for instructions on storing the spare or flat To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do
tire correctly.
the following:
If your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel-drive, the
underbody tire hoist assembly stores only the compact
spare tire. See “Storing the Spare Tire and Tools”
later in this section for instructions. To store a flat
full-size tire correctly, see “Storing the Flat Tire on an
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” later in this section. Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by thejack. If the
spare tire does not slideoff the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
5-74
1. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear 5. Grasp the compact spare tire with both hands and
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack pull it out from under the vehicle.
under the center of the compact spare tire.
6. Reach under the vehicle and remove the folding
2. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the jack wrench and jack.
until it lifts the secondary latch device under the
wheel plate.
3. Keep raising the jack until the compact spare tire
\I-.....:I1 -A
I L--Ll-
, L^ ^A^"^ ^"._"_ _"
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
$I-+ +;"- '
LV awl c 2 apalc VI I t a 1 L I I G U ~~yI
I uu VVIII I jut ut: ~ U I G
the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place,
this lets you know that the secondary latch
has released.
4. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench
coirnlercioekwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the compact spare tire is resting on the folding
wrench.
5-75
Removing the Wheel Covers Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
If the wheel has a center cap, use the handle of the the Spare Tire
folding wrench to pry it off. Then, with the other end of 1. Loosen the wheel
the folding wrench, loosen the nuts. nuts - but do not
remove them - using
the folding wrench.
(Turn the handle about
180 degrees, then
flip the handle back to
the starting position.
This avoids taking
the wrench off the lug
nut for each turn.)
5-76
2. Near each wheel, there Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare
is a notch in the tire near you.
vehicle’s body. Position
the jack and raise
the jack head until it
fits firmly into the notch
in thevehicle’s frame
nearest the flat tire. Getting under aVI- cle when it is jacked up is
~ ~
5-77
3. Attach the folding 6 . Remove any rust or dirt
wrench to the jack, and from the wheel bolts,
turn the wrench mounting surfaces
clockwise to raise the and spare wheel.
jack head a few
inches.
5-78
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-79
9. Tighten the wheel nuts Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
firmly in a crisscross to brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid
sequence, as shown. expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for thewheel nut torque
specification.
5-80
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
5-81
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
1. Lay the tire near the rear of the vehicle with the
valve stem down.
2. If the vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the
small center cap by tapping the back of the cap
with the extension of the shaft.
3. Slide the cable retainer through the center of the
wheel and start to raise the tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the PUSH & PULL
underside of the wheel.
4. When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn
the tire so the valve is towards the rear of the
vehicle.
This will help when you check and maintain tire
pressure in the spare.
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire
vehicle. Continue turning the folding wrench until moves, use the folding wrench to tighten the cable.
you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the
compact spare tire is secure and the cable is Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened. storage compartment and put the compartment cover
back on.
To put the cover back on, line up the tabs on the right
of the cover with the slots in the cover opening. Push the
cover in place and push down the tab so that it rests
in the groove. This secures the cover in place.
5-82
Storing the Flat Tire on a Front-Wheel
Drive Vehicle
Follow the procedure for storing a spare tire listed
previously.
B Storing the Flat Tire on an All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle
1. Remove the tire storage bag and cable package
from the jack storage area.
2. If the vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the
small center cap by tapping the back of the cap
with the extension of the shaft.
3. Put the flat tire in the tire storage bag and place it
in the rear storage area with the valve stem
pointing toward the front of the vehicle.
A. Strap
B. Bag and Tools
C. Jack
Store the center cap or the plastic “bolt-on” wheel
covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle.
When you replace the compact spare with a full-size tire,
reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap.
Tighten them “hand tight” over the wheel nuts, using the
folding wrench.
5-83
5. Hook the cable onto
the outside portion of
the liftgate hinges.
5-84
Compact Spare Tire Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. your compact spare.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa). All-Wheel Drive
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you After installing a compact spare tire on a vehicle with
should stop as soon as possible and make sure all-wheel drive you will need to drive with light to
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare moderate acceleration, for 10 seconds, in a straight line.
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph This action will allow the vehicle to detect the compact
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), spare tire and disable the ail-wheel drive system.
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size The AWD DISABLE message will come on indicating
tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s that the all-wheel drive system is off. You may detect a
best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as slight pull during this time, but this is normal.
soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in
Notice: You may damage your vehicle’s all-wheel
good shape in case you need it again.
drive system if your vehicle is driven for an
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t extended period with a compact spare tire installed
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash and the all-wheel drive system in operation. See
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught “All-Wheel Drive System’’ and “AWD Disable
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, Warning Message” in the Index for more
and mavbe other parts of your vehicle. information.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
5-85
Appearance Care Lacquer Thinner
0 Naphtha
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
0 Paint Thinner surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
0 Turpentine
5-86
FabricICarpet 5. As soon as you've cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains 6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
very well. towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
You can get GM - approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Materials on page 5-92.
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
Here are some cleaning tips: egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
e Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. and blood can be removed as follows:
e Clean up stains as soon as you can - before 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
they set. soiled area with cool water.
e Carefully scrape off any excess stain. 2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
e
described earlier.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a watedbaking soda solution:
stubborn.
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
e If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean of lukewarm water.
the entire area immediately or it will set.
4. Let dry.
Usina Cleaner on Fabric
e
5-88
Built-In Child Restraint Pad Weatherstrips
The built-in child restraint pad is attatched to the seat Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
frame with fastener strips. You can remove the pad and last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
hand wash it with mild soap and water. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least
every six months. During very cold, damp weather
more frequent application may be required. See
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Child Restraint Harness on page 6-17.
Keep the safety belts and the built-in child restraint Cleaning the Outside of Your
harness clean and dry.
Vehicle
I
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
I
L nc -,leachordye
~ safetl elts o he built-in
child restraint harness. If you do, they may be
severely weakened. In a crash, they might not
be able to provide adequate protection. Clean
I. 8r -
the saieiy U ~- I L- Yarw
.-- m -
IN- -I- ? E -I - ___-
- -
_ A _ _ _1 . - 1
u l t : OIIIIU ItzsLlalllL 11ar11es3
I-
5-89
Washing Your Vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
cold water. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle”
previously.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps Finish Care
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on from your dealer. See GM Vehicle CareIAppearance
page 5-92. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum Materials on page 5-92.
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
If your vehicle has a “basecoatklearcoat” paint finish.
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoat paint
avoid surface scratches and water spotting. finish.
Before you enter an automatic car wash, if your vehicle Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
is equipped with the optional power sliding door, be polishing on a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may
sure to have the switch for the power sliding door dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
override feature enabled. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
on page 2- 17. salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
your vehicle. can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
5-90
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
whenever possible. them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper
Blades Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or Tires
windshield.
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always take
not form when you rinse it with water. care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength paint finish and tires.
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Sheet Meta!
Damme
a-
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn. If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
Aluminum Wheels applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with replaced to restore corrosion protection.
mild soap and water. Rinse with ciean water. Aiter
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
may then be applied. corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
5-9 1
Finish Damage Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
expense. can take two forms; blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up the paint surface.
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
in your dealer’s body and paint shop. new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
Underbody Maintenance whichever occurs first.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on Materials
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
the following products.
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
5-92
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description Usage fcont’dl
Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior
Description I Usage
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
Cleaner Wax
I
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
Remover asphalt. Foaming Tire Shine Low
protects in one easy step,
Chrome Cleaner and Use on chrome or Gloss no witina necessary.
Polish stainless steel.
Medium foaming
White Sidewall Tire Removes soil and black shampoo. Cleans and
Cleaner marks from whitewalls. Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes.
Cleans vinyl tops, Biodegradable and
Vinyl Cleaner I upholstery-and DhosDhate
I ‘
free.
I convertible tops. I Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints. I Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Removes dirt and grime
Chrome and Wire Wheel Odorless spray odor
from chrome wheels and
Cleaner eliminator used on
wire wheel covers. Odor Eliminator
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
I catyet
fingerprints, and surface See your General Motors parts department for these
Finish Enhancer contaminants, Spray on products. See Part 0: Recommended Nuids and
Lubricants on page 6-17.
5-93
Vehicle Identification Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box door.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label is:
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
SAMPLE4UX1M072675 a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
5-94
Electrical System Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panel
Notice; Don’t add anything electrical to your protect the power windows and other power accessories.
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your problem is fixed.
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should. Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicleon page I- 102.
and fusible thermal links.
Headlamp Wiring Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
breaker in the instrument panel fuse panel. An electrical size and rating.
overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. If this happens, have If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
your headlamp wiring checked right away. a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage or use one of the spare fuses in the
Windshield Wiper Fuses underhood fuse block. Just pick some feature of your
vehicle that you can get along without - like the radio or
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal cigarette lighter - and use its fuse, if it is the right
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop untii the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle, the instrument
problem, be sure to get it fixed. panel fuse block and the underhood fuse block.
5-95
Instrument Panel Fuse Black F
\
SWC
BACKLIGHT
RH
T/LP LH TLP
The instrument panel fuse PCMPASS KEY/ RR FOG Lp RR DEFOW
HTD CLUSTER MIRROR ELCirRAIER
block is located to the right
of the glove box on the
end of the instrument
IPWRSLODR/
ITlSlG
PWR MIRROR
CRUISE
g
‘’:! CTSY
STARON
SIR
RAPRELAY
!AMP
IGN 1
panel.
a PWRMEATED
PCM/WNK
PASSKEY
PWR LOCK
FRT/WPWWSHR MALL CLUSTER RR WPWSHR
HAZARD
RR PWR SCKT
STOPLAMP LHHEADLPLOW
CLUSTER B A l l LH
HEADLP
HIGH
BCM PRGRM
RH HEAD LP
Low
RH HEADLP
HIGH
\ PCM/ABS
HTD MIRROR DRL
ENHANCED EVAPI
AWD ,
Pull the door open to access the instrument panel fuse
block.
5-96
Fuse Usage Usage
swc Steering Wheel Radio Control RR PWR SCKT
Rear Electric Accessory Plug
BACKLIGHT Switches (Illumination) Housing
PCM/PASS Instrument Cluster to PRNDL Daytime Running Lamp Control
KEYKLUSTER Indicators Module
PWR MIRROR Power Remote Control Mirror Switch Passenger’s Side Taillamp
[LH T/LP (Export Only)
CRUISE Cruise Control Module, Switch and
Release Switch RR Rear Window Defogger Relay,
Blank Not Used DEFOG/HTD Heated Mirrors
MIRROR
Powertrain Control Module (PCM),
PCM/CRANK OnStaP
Ignition Crank
PASS KEY
PWR LOCK
PASS-Key@III System
Power Door Locks t E r
BLOWER
Inflatable Restraint Control Module
Heater-A/C Control
HTD MIRROR Heated Mirrors
Instrument Cluster, Body Control
RH T/LP Driver’s Side Taillamp (Export Only) Module, Electronic Level Control
RR FOG LP Fog Lamps (Export Only) CLUSTER (ELC) Sensor and Relay, Theft,
CIGAR/DIC/ Cigarette Lighter, DIC, Front Door Ajar
APO FRT Auxiliary Power Outlets, Data Link STOP LAMP Stoplamp Switch
LUSTER
~
5-97
I Fuse I Usaae I
Air Inlet Actuator, DIC Display, DRL
HVAC/DIC/DRU Control Module, Heater-A/C Control,
HEATED SEAT Temperature Door Actuator (Front)
and Rear Window Defogger 'Relay
BCM PRGRAM BCM Proarammina
" "
IGN 1 RH HEAD LP Driver's Side Low Beam Headlamp
LOW (Export Only)
RH HEAD LP Driver's Side High Beam Headlamp
HIGH (Export Only)
PCM/ABS IGN MAIN Relay and PCM,
Electronic Brake Control Module
I Blank
J
I Not Used
5-98
Underhood Fuse Block
This fuse block is located
f
in the engine compartment,
in front of the windshield
washer fluid reservoir. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on [21
location. 1)
5-99
Fuse Usage Usage
Ignition Switch to Fuses (Instrument Evaporative Emissions (EVAP)
Panel): ABS/TCS Ignition, Cruise, Canister Purge Valve, Heated
DRL, Electronic PRNDL, Ignition 1, 21
Oxygen Sensors 1 and 2, Mass Air
5
AWD, PSD, Air Bag, Turn Signal Flow (MAFI Sensor
and Powertrain Control Module Not Used
[IGN MAIN Relay (Underhood Fuse
Block: A/C Clutch, Electronic Not Used
Ignition, Ignition 1-U/H, INJ, TCC)] Not Used
6 Coolant Fans Ignition Control Module (ICM)
Fuses (Instrument Panel): ABS Not Used
Module Battery, Cigarette Lighter, Transaxle Range Switch to Back-up
7 Courtesy Lamps, Front Power Lamps
Socket, Power Locks, Power Mirrors
and Right Rear Power Socket, A/C Clutch Relay to A/C
OnStar, RAP Compressor Clutch Oil
Ignition Switch to Fuses (VP): Body Driver Information Display, Heater
Control Module Program, Front A/C Control, Radio, Rear (LH and
Comfort Controls Low/Medium RH) Side Door Actuator Control
Blower, Front WiperANasher, ?9 Motor, Remote Control Door Lock
8 HVAC/DRL, MALURadio/DIC, Receiver (RCDLR), Security
Power Quarter Vent, Rear HVAC, indicator Lamp and Theft-Deterrent
Rear WiperANasher. SWC Shock Sensor
Accessory and Power Window Generator
Circuit Breaker, RAP Automatic Transaxle (Torque
Fuel Injectors 1-6 31 Converter Clutch Solenoids)
Not Used Stoplamp Switch to Powertrain
Control Module
Not Used
5- 100
Fuses:A/C Clutch, Ignition 1-U/H,
11 Electronic Ignition, TCC, Injectors
I 36 I Horn Relav
I
I
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Control Module, Headlamps and
37
5-101
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric measurements.
Please refer to Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6- I7 for more information.
Complete Overhaul
5-102
Fuel Capacity
Regular 20.0 gallons 75.0 L
Extended 25.1 gallons 95.0 L
I I
Engine Specifications
5-103
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Number
A-l208C*
PF47
GM Part No. 52482929
41 -1 01 *
5-104
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ...................................... 6.2 Steering. Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Introduction ................................................... 6.2 Boot and Seal Inspection ............................ 6.15
Your Vehicle and the Environment .................... 6-2 Exhaust System Inspection ............................ 6.15
Maintenance Requirements .............................. 6.2 Fuel System Inspection .................................. 6.16
How This Section is Organized ......................... 6-3 Engine Cooling System Inspection ................... 6.16
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ..........-6-4 Throttle System Inspection ............................. 6.16
Using Your Maintenance Schedule .................... 6.4 Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) and
Scheduled Maintenance ................................... 6.5 Carrier Assembly-Differential
Part B: Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 (Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 6-10 Inspection ................................................ 6.16
At Least Once a Month ................................. 6-10 Brake System Inspection ................................ 6.16
At Least Twice a Year ................................... 6.11 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-17
At Least Once a Year ................................... 6-12 Part E: Maintenance Record .......................... -6-19
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6.15
6- 1
Maintenance Schedule Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
Introduction vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
IMPORTAN fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
I
KEEP ENGINEOIL
AT THE PROPER the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
LWFL AND CHANGE AS our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
ECOMI VDED condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
I Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow recommended maintenance may not be
covered by warranty.
6-2
How This Section is Organized “Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts: you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
services can be complex, so unless you are technically important inspections that your dealer’s service
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you department or another qualified service center should
should let your dealer’s service department or another perform.
qualified service center do these jobs. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
Perform,,,g mair,,,nance work on a vehicle can “Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
can be seriously injured. Do your own your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
maintenance work only if you have the may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty
required know-how and the proper tools and repairs.
equipment for the job.If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
Services frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
This part contains engine oil and chassis lubrication questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
scheduled maintenance which explains the engine oil life see your dealer.
system and how it indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. Lubricate chassis components with This part tells you the maintenance services you should
each oil change. Also, listed are scheduled maintenance have done and when you should schedule them.
services which are to be performed at the mileage When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
intervals specified. you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using GM parts.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
We at General Motors want to help you to keep them. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive vehicle.
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may This schedule is for vehicles that:
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. e carry passengers and cargo within recommended
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
other ways. Certificationnire label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-34.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
6-4
Scheduled Maintenance Footnotes
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles t The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles California Air Resources Board has determined that the
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval the completion of the vehicle 's useful life. We, however,
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this urge that all recommended maintenance services be
vehicle. performed at the indicated intervalsand the
maintenance be recorded.
See Part €3:Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on +- A good time to check your brakes isduring tire
page 6-15. rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-16.
6-5
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
Scheduled Maintenance changed at least once a year and at this time the
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM system must be reset. It is also important to check your
Oil Life System (or every 12 months, whichever oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
occurs first). Reset the system. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, page 5-73for information on resetting the system.
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can An Emission Control Service.
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil
changed. and filter change.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage, transaxle
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is shift linkage and the underbody contact points and
necessary. A change engine oil message will come on. linkage.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next After the services are performed, record the date,
two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are odometer reading and who performed the service on the
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system maintenance record pages in Part E of this schedule.
6-6
7,500 Miles (12 500 km) 0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
information. (See footnote +.) U Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) Control Service.
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in 37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.) U Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter information. (See footnote +.)
may require replacement more often.
U Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on 45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional 0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
information. (See footnote +.) dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
22,500Miles (37 500 km) Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
tl Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on 0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
information. (See footnote +.) may require replacement more often.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter information. (See footnote +.)
may require replacement more often.
6-7
50,000 Miles (83000 km) 60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
U Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the 0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
these conditions: may require replacement more often.
- In heavy city traffic where the outside 0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
higher. information. (See footnote +.)
- In hilly or mountainous terrain. U Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
- When doing frequent trailer towing. Control Service.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery 67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
service.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles information. (See footnote +.)
(1 66 000 km).
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
52,500Miles (87 500 km)
U Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
information. (See footnote +,)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
c1 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-8
82,500 Miles (137 500 km) 0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on these conditions:
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.) - In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter - When doing frequent trailer towing.
may require replacement more often. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
U Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission service.
Control Service. 0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both
information. (See footnote +.) the fluid and filter.
6-9
Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
which should be performed at the intervals specified to coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission on page 5-23 for further details.
control performance of your vehicle.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
in Part D. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page5-38 for further
details.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check Make sure tries are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See Tires on
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if page 5-60 for further details.
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-73for further
details. Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio Systern(s)
on page 3-61 for further details.
6-10
At Least Twice a Year Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of
Restraint System Check the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try
are working properly. If your vehicle has a built-in to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the folding
child restraint, also periodically make sure the harness wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat Tire
straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, child head restraint on page 5-70.
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safetybelt and built-in child restraint Weatherstrip Lubrication
system parts. If you see anything that might keep a Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
safety belt or built-in child restraint system from doing longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
safety belts or harness straps replaced. damp weather more frequent application may be
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag Lubricants on page 6-17.
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Automatic Transaxle Check
Wiper Blade Check Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-20. A fluid loss
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged orthat may inciicaie a probiem. Zileck ine sysierrl arlu repair i i
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see needed.
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-89.
6-11
At Least Once a Year StaY+erSwitch Ct-ck
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assemblies,
secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and release
pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding seats, fuel door
hinge, liftgate hinges, power sliding door cable and
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
6-12
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-38if necessary.
System Check
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
vvllenyou are doing this check, the vehicle of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
I Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
surface. * The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
0 The key should come out only in LOCK.
6-13
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
Paulm(P) Mechanism *henil parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
wnen you are doing this check, your vehicle parking brake only.
could begin to move. You or others could be To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
injured and property could be damaged.Make With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in release the parking brake followed by the regular
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the brake.
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move. Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-14
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Steering, Suspension and Front
Inspections Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Listed in this part are inspections and services which Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
service department or other qualified service centerdo lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
completed at once. axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
Proper procedures to perform these services may be seals if necessary.
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-9. Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-42.
6-15
Fuel System Inspection Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks. and Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive
Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals,
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
check rear differential and transfer case and add
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
lubricant when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
problem; check and have it repaired, if needed.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
Check vent hoses at transfer case and differential for
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
kinks and proper installation.
at least once a year.
6-16
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering (GM Part No. U.S. 1052884,
System in Canada 993294, or equivalent).
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your DEXRON-Ill Automatic Transmission
dealer. Fluid.
Mulit-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Fluid/Lubricant Cylinders Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Engine oil with the American Chassis Lubricant
Petroleum Institute Certified for (GM Part No. U S . 12377985, in
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Chassis Canada 88901242, or equivalent) or
Engine Oil of the proper viscosity. To determine Lubrication lubricant meeting requirements of
the preferred viscosity for your NLGl #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5- 13. Carrier
Assembly -
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Differential
water and use only DEX-COOL VERSATRAKTMFluid
Engine Coolant Coolant. See Engine Coolant on (Rear Drive (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514, in
Module) and Canada 88901045).
page 5-23. Transfer
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or Case (Power
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Transfer Unit)
GM Optikleen Washer Solvent or
equivalent.
6-1 7
Usage Fluid/Lubricant I Fluid/Lubricant I
Hood Latch Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Secondary (GM Part No. U S . 12346293, in 'Iiding Door Canada 992723, or equivalent) or
Latch, Canada 992723, or equivalent) or Track
lubricant meeting requirements of
Pivots, Spring lubricant meeting requirements of NLGl #2, Cateqow LB or GC-LB.
Anchor and NLGl #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Dielectric Silicone Grease
Release Pawl Weatherstrip (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Hood and Door 'Onditioning Canada 10953014, or eauivalent).
Hinges, Rear
Folding Seat,
Fuel Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinge, Liftgate Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Hinges, Power
Sliding Door
Cable
6-18
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance’’ on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
6-19
MaintenanceRecord (cont’d)
6-20
MaintenanceRecord (cont’d),
I Date I Odometer
Reading
6-21
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
6-22
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance Information =.. . . .. ... . .. .. ... . .. .7-2 Courtesy Transportation . . .. ... .= ... . ..... .. .. ... .. . ..7-6
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . ............ .. . .* . .. .7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the United
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone States Government .. .. . . . ...... .. . .. ..... . ... ..." ,, . . .. .7-8
(TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,..........__
-7-3 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Customer Assistance Off ices ..~.. . ".....".... . ... .. .... .7-3 Government . ... .... . .... .. ... . .. ...... ... .. ..... .... .. . ...7-9
GM Mobility Program for Persons with Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . ......7- 9
Disabilities ......_......". __.... ... = ...... ... . . I . .... . ~...7-4
..s Service Publications Ordering Information .. ., .. .....7-9
Roadside Assistance Program . . ... . ... ... .. . . . . .. .. .7-5
7-1
Customer Assistance We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
Information the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
7-2
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program Customer Assistance for Text
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle Telephone (TTY) Users
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
filing a court action, use of the program is free of Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
charge and your case will generally be heard within with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you. Customer Assistance Off ices
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number or write them at the following address: number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
BBB Auto Line
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard United States
Suite 800
Chevrolet Motor Division
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
I hls program is avaiiabie in a i 56 siaies arid iire CjisiriGi
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, 1-800-222-1020
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the 1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue Fax Number: 313-381-0022
its participation in this program.
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-3
From U.S. Virgin Islands: GM Mobility Program for Persons
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022 with Disabilities
Canada This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
General Motors of Canada Limited reimburse you up to
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
$1,000 toward aftermarket
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
driver or passenger
Oshawa, Ontario L I H 8P7
adaptive equipment you
1-800-263-3777 (English) may require for your
1-800-263-7854 (French) vehicle (hand controls,
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) wheelchair/scooter
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800 lifts, etc.).
7-5
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or Canadian Roadside Assistance
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care at Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
any time. in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service.
When roadside services are required, our advisors will Courtesy Transportation
explain any payment obligations that may be incurred
for utilizing outside services. Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
following available to give to the advisor; are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) support program for new vehicles.
* License plate number The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchaseAease customers in conjunction with the
@ Vehicle color Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
* Vehicle location Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
Telephone number where you can be reached This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
OB Vehicle mileage repairs.
Description of problem
7-6
Plan Ahead When Possible Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment. If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
By scheduling a service appointment and advising reimbursement up to $30 per day (five day maximum)
your service consultant of your transportation needs, may be available for the use of public transportation
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service transportation through a friend or relative,
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is $10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
them know this, and ask for instructions. supported by original receipts.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle Courtesy Rental Vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair. When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
Transportation Options you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, _ n -_..
:.-_ _ - _ L-
ICyuIICl IlGl lla. I lcyull GI I lGl 1 1 3
V U 1
,,_".,
y
UI I U
-",, ;nfil,,dlr
IIluyII I W I U V b
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
Shuttle Service card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
service to get you to your destination with minimal the completion of the repair.
interruption of you: daily schedule. This Inc!udes a one
way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
the dealership. courtesy rental.
7-7
Additional Program Information Reporting Safety Defects to the
Courtesy Transportation is available during the United States Government
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
provides detailed warranty coverage information. Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
contact you dealer for specific information about a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-01 23in
alternative transportation may be available under the the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
your dealer for details. Washington, D.C. 20590
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, You can also obtain other information about motor
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at vehicle safety from the hotline.
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-8
Reporting Safety Defects to the Service Publications Ordering
Canadian Government Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Service Manuals
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
Transport Canada brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
330 Sparks Street
Tower C RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Ottawa, Ontario K I A ON5
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Reporting Safety Defects to General Case Unit Repair Manual
Motors This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write: RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
1
Audio Systems
AM-FMRadio ............................................. 3-62
B
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-103 Backing Up .................................................... 4-41
Care ofYour CD and DVD Player ................ 3-104 Battery .......................................................... 5-43
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-104 Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-8
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-104 Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-20
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-71 Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-65 Before You Drive ............................................ 3-91
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-81 Bench Seat, Split ............................................. 1-8
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...................... 3-98, 3-100 Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-12
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Brake
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-61 Parking ................................... ... 2-38
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio System Inspection .................... ... 6-16
Data Systems(RDS) ................................ 3-61 SystemWarning
Light ............... ....... 3-41
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-102 Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-40
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-102 BrakeWear ................................................... 5-42
AutomaticDoorLocks ..................................... 2-64 Brakes .......................................................... 5-40
Automatic Level Control ................................... 4-35 Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Automatic Transaxle Braking in Emergencies ..... ........................ 4-8
Fluid ....................................................... 5-20 Break-In, NewVehicle ................................. 2-31
Operation ................................................... 2-34 Bucket Seats, Rear ......................................... 1-15
Automatic Transaxle Check .......................... 6-1 1 Built-in Child Restraint ..................................... 1-82
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control Built-In Child Restraint Pad .............................. 5-89
System
Check ............................. ~ .. 6-13
2
Bulb
Replacement ................................ .... 5-52 Carrier Assembly-Differential
Front Turn Signal. Sidemarker and (Rear Drive Module) .................................... 5-51
Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-54 Cassette Tape Messages ................................. 3-78
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52 Cassette Tape Player Service ........................... 6-10
Headlamps ................................................. 5-52 CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-79
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-57 Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ..... 1-45, 1-47
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-67
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-56 Change Engine Oil Message ............................ 3-54
BuyingNewTires ........................................... 5-64 Charging System Indicator Message .................. 3-52
Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-45
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-24
C Checking Engine Oil ........................................
Checking or Replacing the Engine Air
5-14
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Cleaner/Filter .............................................. 5-19
Canada ........................................................... 7-4
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-6 Checking Your Restraint Systems .................... 1-103
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-92
Canceling the Sliding Door
Child Restraints
Security Lock .............................................. 2-16
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-102 Built-In Child Restraint ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-61
Captain Chairs, Rear ....................................... 1-22
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-58
CarbonMonoxide ................... 4-26, 4-36, 2-22, 2-42
(-2r p cf y p f ) l Ep!!c, 2nd R%li!f-inChild Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Restraint Harness ........................ Chiiuren (LHI LH Systemj .......................... 1-69
........ 5-89
Older Children ............................................. 1-55
Care of Your
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
Cassette Tape Player ................................. 3-103
CD and DVD Player ................................... 3-104 the LATCH System ................................... 1-71
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
CDs and DVDs ......................................... 3-104
Cargo Lamp ................................................... 3-23 Seat Position ................................... 1-75, 1-77
3
Child Restraints (cont.) Content Theft-Deterrent System. Arming
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear and Disarming ............................................. 2-70
Outside Seat Position ..................... .. 1-71 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Convenience Center ........................................ 2-59
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-79 Convenience Net ............................................ 2-58
Top Strap ................................................... 1-66 Coolant
Top Strap Anchor Location ........................ 1-67 EngineTemperatureGage ............................ 3-44
Where to Putthe Restraint .................. ~ ~ .. 1-65 Engine Temperature Warning Message ........... 3-51
Cleating Heater,Engine ............................................ 2-33
Inside Your
of Vehicle ..... . . . . . . . . . . 5-86 Cooling System .............................................. 5-29
Outside of Your Vehicle ..., ..................... 5-89 Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
UnderbodyMaintenance .., ......................... 5-92 Cupholder(s) .............................................. 2-52
Video
Screen ................. ................... 3-104 Current and Past Model Order Forms ..... ... 7-10
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-89 Customer Assistance Information
Your DVD Player ....................................... 3-104 Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-6
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-90 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Climate Control System ................................... 3-25 Users ....................................................... 7-3
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-33 Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-3
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-28 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
Rear .................................................. 3-28, 3-31 GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Comfort Controls ............................................. 3-25 Disabilities ................................................ 7-4
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ...... 7-9
CompactDiscMessages ................. 3-71, 3-80, 3-90 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Compact Overhead Console ............................. 2-52 Government .............................................. 7-9
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-85 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Compass Variance .......................................... 3-59 Government .............................................. 7-8
Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-27 Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5
Content Theft-Deterrent System ........................ 2-69 Service Publications Ordering Information ......... 7-9
4
D Driver
Position. Safety Belt ..................................... 1-36
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp Driver Information Center (DIC) ..................... 3-58
System ...................................................... 3-16 Driving
DefensiveDriving ............................................. 4-2 At Night ..................................................... 4-15
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-27 City ........................................................... 4-20
Delayed Illumination and Exit Lighting ................ 2-63 Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Delayed Lighting ............................................. 3-18 Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-33 Freeway ..................................................... 4-21
Directing the Airflow ................................ 3-29, 3-32 Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24
Disarming with the Remote Keyless Entry In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17
Transmitter ................................................. 2-28 Winter ........................................................ 4-26
Disarming with Your Key .................................. 2-28 Driving on Grades ........................................... 4-42
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4 Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-27
DollyTowing .................................................. 4-33 Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-19
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-18 Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-19
Door Driving with a Trailer .................................... 4-40
AjarWarningMessage ................................. 3-55 Dual Trip Odometers .............. .............. 3-38
Dual
SlidingDoors ....................... ......... 2-13 DVD
Last
Door Closed Locking ......... ..... 2-12 Care ofYour ............................................. 3-104
Locks .......................................................... 2-9 Care of Your DVD Player ............................ 3-104
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-1 1 Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-104
Power siiuing uoor ...................................... 2-17 Gleaning Your u v l j Piayer .......................... 3-104
Power Sliding Warning Message .................... 3-54 Distortion .................................................. 3-1 02
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Entertainment System .................................. 3-91
DVD Player .................................................... 3-95
5
E Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication
ScheduledMaintenance ................................. 6-6
Electrical System Engine Oil Level Check ................................... 6-10
Add-on Equipment ...................................... 5-95 Engine Specifications ..................................... 5-103
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-95 Entering ProgrammingMode ............................ 2-63
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-95 Entertainment System ...................................... 3-91
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-95 Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-104
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-95 Cleaning Your DVDPlayer .......................... 3-104
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance DVD Distortion .......................................... 3-102
Programs ................................................... 3-48 Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-18
Engine Erasing HomeLink@ Buttons.............................. 2-51
Air CleanedFilter ......................................... 5-18 Exit Lighting ......................... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
6
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-69
Flat Tire,Changing ......................................... 5-70 G
Flip and Fold Rear Seats .................................. 1-7 Gage
Fluid Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-44
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-20 Fuel .......................................................... 3-48
Power Steering ........................................... 5-37 Speedometer .............................................. 3-38
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-38 Tachometer ................................................. 3-39
FM .............................................................. 3-102 Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-48
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks ... 1-10, 1-17, 1-22 Garage Door Opener Compartment ................... 2-54
Folding the Seatback ....................................... 1-26 Gasoline
FollowingDistance ................... ............... 4-41 Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Footnotes ........................................................ 6-5 Specifications ............................................... 5-5
FrontReadingLamps ...................................... 3-19 Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming ........ 2-50
Front Seat Storage Net .................................... 2-55 Glass Surfaces ............................................... 5-88
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5 GloveBox ..................................................... 2-52
Additives ...................................................... 5-6 GM Mobility Program for Persons with
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6 Disabilities ............................................. 7-4
Filling aPortable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling YourTank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-48 Hatch Ajar Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
GasolineOctane ........................................... 5-5 Ha7ard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-6
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5 Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
LowWarningMessage ................................. 3-57 Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-95
System Inspection ....................................... 6-16 Headlamps .................................................... 5-52
Fuses Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .................... .... 5-95 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Windshield Wiper ................................. , .... 5-95 Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-54
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
7
Headphones ................................................... 3-91 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..... ........... 4-37
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23 If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ........... ........... 4-28
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24 Ignition Positions ............................. ........... 2-31
Hitches ...................................................... 4-39 Ignition Transaxle LockCheck .......... ........... 6-13
HomeLink Transmitter, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Infants and Young Children, Restraints ........... 1-58
HomeLink@Transmitter .................. .......... 2-48 Inflation -.Tire Pressure .................. ........... 5-61
Hood Inspection
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10 BrakeSystem ............................. ........... 6-16
Release ..................................................... 5-10 Engine Cooling System ................ ........... 6-16
Horn ............................................................... 3-7 ExhaustSystem .......................... ........... 6-15
How the SystemWorks ................................... 3-23 Fuel System ............................... ........... 6-16
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....... ........... 6-15
Recovery Tank .......................... ... 5-31 Steering. Suspension and Front Drive Axle
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-34 Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-15
How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-22 Throttle System ........................................... 6-16
How to Check ........................................ 5-20, 5-61 Transfer Care (Power Transfer Unit)
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-38 and Carrier Assembly-Differential
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii (Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 6-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-35 Instrument Panel
Hydroplaning ................................ ... 4-18 Cluster ....................................................... 3-36
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Switchbank ................................................. 3-21
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-17
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-28 Instrument Panel FuseBlock ............................ 5-96
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-27 Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-17
If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-46 Interior Lamps Control ..................................... 3-17
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-47 Interior Lamps Override ................................... 3-17
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-30 Interior Plastic Components .............................. 5-88
8
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running ... 2-40
Liftgate .......................................................... 2-22
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-44 Light
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-40
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-42
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-41
Key Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-12 Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-45
KeylessEntrySystem ....................................... 2-5 Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 3-40
Keys ............................................................... 2-3 TCS Warning Light .................................. 3-43
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-43
Lighted Vanity Mirror ....................................... 2-26
L Loading Your Vehicle .......................................
Lockout Deterrent ........................................... 2-65
4-34
9
M Maintenance When Trailer Towing .....................
Making Turns .................................................
4-43
4-41
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-104 Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-45
Maintenance Schedule Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
At
Each Fuel Fill ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 ManualWindows ............................................ 2-24
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10 Matching Transmitter(s) toYourVehicle ............... 2-7
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-12 Message
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-1 1 All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning .................... 3-57
BrakeSystem Inspection .............................. 6-16
Center ....................................................... 3-50
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-16
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-15 ChangeEngine Oil ...................................... 3-54
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-16 ChargingSystemIndicator ............................ 3-52
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3 Door Ajar Warning ....................................... 3-55
Introduction .................................................. 6-2 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-51
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2 Low Engine Oil Level ................................... 3-53
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4 Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-57
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-10 Low Oil Pressure ......................................... 3-52
Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-15
I
PASS-Key@Ill Security ................................. 3-56
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Power Sliding DoorWarning ......................... 3-54
Lubricants ............................................... 6-17 Rear Hatch Ajar Warning .............................. 3-56
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-19 Service Traction System Warning ................... 3-50
ScheduledMaintenance ................................. 6-5 Traction Active ............................................ 3-51
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Bootand Seal Inspection .......................... 6-15 Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-16 and U S. Virgin Islands) ........................ .7-4
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) Mirrors
and Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-44
Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive Inspection ..... 6-16 Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-45
Using Your ................................................... 6-4 Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-45
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2 Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-44
10
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ............... ............ 5-26
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-31 Owners.Canadian ................... ..................... II
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-104 Owner’s Information .................... , . . . . . . . . 7-10
11
PASS-Key@Ill Security Message .......................
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................
3-56
7-7 Q
Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-77 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-34
Playing aCompactDisc .................. 3-70, 3-79, 3-86
Playing a Specific Loaded Compact Disc ............ 3-87
Playing the Radio ................... 3-62, 3-65, 3-71, 3-81 R
Power Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-26
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-24 Radio Messages ............................. 3.64.3.69. 3-76
Door Locks ................................................. 2-1 1 Radios .......................................................... 3-61
Electrical System ......................................... 5-95 AM-FM ...................................................... 3-62
Rear Quarter Windows ................................. 2-26 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-103
Six-WaySeats .............................................. 1-4 Care ofYour CD and DVD Player ................ 3-104
Sliding Door ................................................ 2-17 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-104
Sliding Door Warning Message ...................... 3-54 Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-71
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-37 Radio with CD ............................ ........ 3-65
Windows .................................................... 2-25 Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-81
Power Steering ............................................... 4-10 Rear Seat Audio ................................ 3-98, 3-100
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-54 Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Primary Radio Controls .................................... 3-98 Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-61
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-12 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Programmable DataSystems(RDS) ................................ 3-61
Modes ....... 2-63, 2-64, 2-65, 2-66, 2-67, 2-69, 2-70 Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-1 02
ProgrammingMode Understanding Reception ... .................. 3-102
Entering ..................................................... 2-63 RDSMessages .............................. 3-68, 3-75, 3-85
Exiting ....................................................... 2-71 Rear Climate Control System ................... 3-28,3-31
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter ............. 2-49 Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message .................... 3-56
12
Rear ReadingLamps ...................................... 3-20 Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-57
Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides ...................... 1-52 Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-43
Rear Seat Audio ................................... 3-98, 3-100 Replacing Restraint System Parts After
RearSeat Operation ......................................... 1-7 a Crash .................................................... 1-104
RearSeat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-49 Replacing the Bucket Seats .............................. 1-20
RearSeatPassengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-48 Replacing the Captain’s Chairs ......................... 1-24
RearSeatRadio Controls ...................... 3-98, 3-100 Replacing the Convenience Center .................... 2-60
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-58 Replacing the Split Bench Seats ....................... 1-12
Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-27 Replacing the Stowable Seat ............................ 1-28
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-44 Reporting Safety Defects
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4 CanadianGovernment ................................... 7-9
Recreational
VehicleTowing ...... ................4-32 General Motors ............................................. 7-9
Remote Alarm .................................................. 2-7 United States Government .............................. 7-8
Remote Control .............................................. 3-96 Reprogramminga Single HomeLink@Button ....... 2-51
Remote Driver Unlock Control ........................... 2-66 Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-51
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5 Resetting the Power Sliding Door ...................... 2-21
Remote Keyless EntrySystem, Operation ............ 2-6 Restraint System Check ................................... 6-11
Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation ............... 2-67 Checking Your Restraint Systems ................. 1-103
Remote Power Sliding Door Operation ................. 2-7 Replacing Restraint System Parts After
Removing the BucketSeats ............................. 1-18 aCrash ............................................ 1-104
Removing the Captain’s Chairs ......................... 1-23 Restraint Systems
Removing the Child from the Built-In Child Checking .................................................. 1-103
Restraint .................................................... 1-YW Repiacing Parts ......................................... 1-i
0 4
Removing the Convenience Center .................... 2-60 Restraints, Head ............................................... 1-6
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-32
SpareTire .................................................. 5-76 Retro-Active Reset .......................................... 3-39
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-71 Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-45
Removing the Split Bench Seat ........................ 1-11 Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 7-5
Removing the Stowable Seat ............................ 1-27 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-31
Removing the Wheel Covers ............................ 5-76 Running Your Engine While YouAre Parked ....... 2-43
13
S Seats (cont.)
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7
Safety Belt Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-54 Six-WayPowerSeats .................................... 1-4
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-40 Split BenchSeats ......................................... 1-8
Stowage,SecondRowSeat ........................... 1-7 StowableSeat ............................................ 1-26
Safety Belts Second Row Safety Belt Stowage ....................... 1-7
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Child Securing a Child in the Built-In Child Restraint .... 1-84
Restraint Harness ..................................... 5-89 Securing a Child Restraint
Center Passenger Position .................... 1-45, 1-47 Center Seat Position ............................ 1-75, 1-77
Driver Position ............................................ 1-36 Designedfor the LATCHSystem .... , ....... 1-71
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-35 Rear Outside Seat Position ........ , ....... 1-71
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-34 Right Front Seat Position ........... ........... 1-79
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children Security Message, PASS-Key@ I l l ... ........... 3-56
and Small Adults ...................................... 1-52 Selecting the FanSpeed ......................... 3-29, 3-32
RearSeatPassengers ................................. 1-48 Service ........................................................... 5-3
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-45 Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-54 Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
Safety BeltUse During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Safety Belts Are
for
Everyone ...... ...... 1-30 Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-45
Safety Chains ................................ .......... 4-39
... Publications Ordering Information ..................... 7-9
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......... .............. I l l Traction System Warning Message ................. 3-50
Scheduled
Maintenance .............. ............... 6-5 Service Bulletins ............................................... 7-9
Seats Service Engine Soon Light in the United States
Bucket Seats, Rear ................................... 1-15 or Check Engine Light in Canada .................. 3-45
Captain Chairs ........ ............................. 1-22 Service Manuals ............................................... 7-9
Flip and Fold Feature .................................... 1-7 Setting Preset PTYs ........................................ 3-85
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6 Setting Preset Stations ............ 3-63, 3-66, 3-73, 3-82
Manual ........................................................ 1-3 Setting the Temperature ........................... 3-30, 3-32
'4
Setting the Time Stereo RCAJacks .......................................... 3-93
RadioswithRadioDataSystems(RDS) ......... 3-61 Storage Areas ............................................ 2-52
Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ..... 3-61 Compact Overhead Console ...................... 2-52
Setting the Tone Convenience Center ..................................... 2-59
(Bassnreble) ...................... 3.63.3.66.3.73. 3-82 Convenience Net ......................................... 2-58
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-91 Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-52
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-39 Front Seat Storage Net ................................ 2-55
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-41 GloveBox .................................................. 2-52
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-38 Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-56
SideWindow Latches ...................................... 2-25 Overhead Console ....................................... 2-53
Skidding ........................................................ 4-14 Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-58
Sliding DoorPower .......................................... 2-17 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-81
Sliding Door Delayed Locking ........................... 2-13 Storing the Built-In Child Restraint ..................... 1-91
SlidingDoorLock ........................................... 2-14 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ....................... 5-82
Sliding Door Security Lock ............................... 2-15 Stowable Seat ................................................ 1-26
SlidingDoors,Dual ......................................... 2-13 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-19 Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-26
Spare Tire Check ............................................ 6-11 Switchbanks ................................................... 3-20
SpecialFabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-87 Overhead Console ....................................... 3-21
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-102 Switchbanks, Instrument Panel .......................... 3-21
Speedometer .................................................. 3-38
Split Bench Seats ............................................. 1-8
Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-12
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-32
Tachometer .................................................... 3-39
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Taillamps
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-1 1
Turn Signal. Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-56
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-43
Boot and Seal Inspection .............................. 6-15
T h e f t - E e t e ~ ~ nRacfi~
i, .................................... 3-1 02
Steering Tips .............................................. 4-10
15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-27 Towing(cont.)
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-27 Your Vehicle ................ ............ , ... 4-32
16
UsedReplacementWheels .............................. 5-67 Vehicle Storage ...................... ............. 5-44
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-87 Ventilation Adjustment ............................... 3-28
Using
HomeLinkO ......... .......................... 2-51 VideoScreen ................................................. 3-94
UsingRDS .................................... 3-67, 3-74, 3-83 Vinyl ............................................................. 5-88
Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-89 VisorVanity Mirror .......................................... 2-26
Ustrasonic
Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) 3-22 Visors ........................................................... 2-26
W
Vehicle Warm-up Shift ................................ ..... 2-37
Control .................... ..... 4-5 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators .... ..... 3-35
Damage
Warnings ......... .... .... IV Warnings
Loading ....................................... .... 4-34 HazardWarning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Symbols .......................................... .... iv OtherWarning Devices .................................. 3-6
Vehicle Identification Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Number(VIN) ............................................. 5-94 VehicleDamage .............................................. iv
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-94 Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-90
VehiclePersonalization .................................... 2-62 Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-11
Arming and Disarming the Content Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-37
Theft-Deterrent System ............................. 2-70 Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-38
AutomaticDoorLocks .................................. 2-64 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use .... ............. 5-16
Pnntnnt Thnft nntnrrnnt
"VIIIU, , II I I k I C
.
Citrtom .....................
W U L U , , " , I I VJ"'"' L
9-m
" V !I\!!?e
-?ne& !?!it!? Used Qi! ............................. 5-18
Delayed Illumination and Exit Lighting ............. 2-63 What to Use ...................................... 5-24, 5-38
Entering ProgrammingMode ......................... 2-63 Wheels
ExitingProgrammingMode ........................... 2-71 Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-66
Last Door Locking and Lockout Deterrent ........ 2-65 Replacement ............................................... 5-66
RemoteDriverUnlock Control ....................... 2-66 When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-15
Remote Lock and Uniock Coniiri-naiion ........... ~ A P
-07
17
When to Change Engine Oil Windshield. Backglass and Wiper Blades ........... 5-91
(GM Oil LifeSystem) ................................... 5-17 Windshield Washer ............................ ............ 3-10
When to Check .............................................. 5-61 Fluid ............................................. ............ 5-38
When to Check and Change ............................ 5-20 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ... ............ 6-10
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-38 Windshield Wiper
When You Are Ready to Leave After Blade Replacement ......................... ............ 5-58
Parking on a Hill ......................................... 4-43 Fuses ........................................... ............ 5-95
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-65 Windshield Wipers .............................. ............. 3-9
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-31 Winter Driving ................................... ............ 4-26
Windows ....................................................... 2-24 Wiper Blade Check ............................ ............ 6-11
Manual ...................................................... 2-24
Power ..................................................... 2-25
Power Rear Quarter ..................................
Side Window Latches .....................
2-26
... 2-25
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ...... ............. 6-2
18
6 NOTES
.& NOTES
Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.
Alternative Proxies: